1 //===--- ASTContext.cpp - Context to hold long-lived AST nodes ------------===//
2 //
3 //                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4 //
5 // This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6 // License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
7 //
8 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
9 //
10 //  This file implements the ASTContext interface.
11 //
12 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13 
14 #include "clang/AST/ASTContext.h"
15 #include "CXXABI.h"
16 #include "clang/AST/ASTMutationListener.h"
17 #include "clang/AST/Attr.h"
18 #include "clang/AST/CharUnits.h"
19 #include "clang/AST/Comment.h"
20 #include "clang/AST/CommentCommandTraits.h"
21 #include "clang/AST/DeclCXX.h"
22 #include "clang/AST/DeclObjC.h"
23 #include "clang/AST/DeclTemplate.h"
24 #include "clang/AST/Expr.h"
25 #include "clang/AST/ExprCXX.h"
26 #include "clang/AST/ExternalASTSource.h"
27 #include "clang/AST/Mangle.h"
28 #include "clang/AST/RecordLayout.h"
29 #include "clang/AST/TypeLoc.h"
30 #include "clang/Basic/Builtins.h"
31 #include "clang/Basic/SourceManager.h"
32 #include "clang/Basic/TargetInfo.h"
33 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallString.h"
34 #include "llvm/ADT/StringExtras.h"
35 #include "llvm/Support/Capacity.h"
36 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
37 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
38 #include <map>
39 
40 using namespace clang;
41 
42 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructors;
43 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared;
44 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructors;
45 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared;
46 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructors;
47 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared;
48 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators;
49 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared;
50 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators;
51 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared;
52 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructors;
53 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared;
54 
55 enum FloatingRank {
56   HalfRank, FloatRank, DoubleRank, LongDoubleRank
57 };
58 
59 RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(const Decl *D) const {
60   if (!CommentsLoaded && ExternalSource) {
61     ExternalSource->ReadComments();
62     CommentsLoaded = true;
63   }
64 
65   assert(D);
66 
67   // User can not attach documentation to implicit declarations.
68   if (D->isImplicit())
69     return NULL;
70 
71   // User can not attach documentation to implicit instantiations.
72   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
73     if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
74       return NULL;
75   }
76 
77   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
78     if (VD->isStaticDataMember() &&
79         VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
80       return NULL;
81   }
82 
83   if (const CXXRecordDecl *CRD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) {
84     if (CRD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
85       return NULL;
86   }
87 
88   if (const ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *CTSD =
89           dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(D)) {
90     TemplateSpecializationKind TSK = CTSD->getSpecializationKind();
91     if (TSK == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation ||
92         TSK == TSK_Undeclared)
93       return NULL;
94   }
95 
96   if (const EnumDecl *ED = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(D)) {
97     if (ED->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
98       return NULL;
99   }
100   if (const TagDecl *TD = dyn_cast<TagDecl>(D)) {
101     // When tag declaration (but not definition!) is part of the
102     // decl-specifier-seq of some other declaration, it doesn't get comment
103     if (TD->isEmbeddedInDeclarator() && !TD->isCompleteDefinition())
104       return NULL;
105   }
106   // TODO: handle comments for function parameters properly.
107   if (isa<ParmVarDecl>(D))
108     return NULL;
109 
110   // TODO: we could look up template parameter documentation in the template
111   // documentation.
112   if (isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(D) ||
113       isa<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(D) ||
114       isa<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(D))
115     return NULL;
116 
117   ArrayRef<RawComment *> RawComments = Comments.getComments();
118 
119   // If there are no comments anywhere, we won't find anything.
120   if (RawComments.empty())
121     return NULL;
122 
123   // Find declaration location.
124   // For Objective-C declarations we generally don't expect to have multiple
125   // declarators, thus use declaration starting location as the "declaration
126   // location".
127   // For all other declarations multiple declarators are used quite frequently,
128   // so we use the location of the identifier as the "declaration location".
129   SourceLocation DeclLoc;
130   if (isa<ObjCMethodDecl>(D) || isa<ObjCContainerDecl>(D) ||
131       isa<ObjCPropertyDecl>(D) ||
132       isa<RedeclarableTemplateDecl>(D) ||
133       isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(D))
134     DeclLoc = D->getLocStart();
135   else
136     DeclLoc = D->getLocation();
137 
138   // If the declaration doesn't map directly to a location in a file, we
139   // can't find the comment.
140   if (DeclLoc.isInvalid() || !DeclLoc.isFileID())
141     return NULL;
142 
143   // Find the comment that occurs just after this declaration.
144   ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator Comment;
145   {
146     // When searching for comments during parsing, the comment we are looking
147     // for is usually among the last two comments we parsed -- check them
148     // first.
149     RawComment CommentAtDeclLoc(
150         SourceMgr, SourceRange(DeclLoc), false,
151         LangOpts.CommentOpts.ParseAllComments);
152     BeforeThanCompare<RawComment> Compare(SourceMgr);
153     ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator MaybeBeforeDecl = RawComments.end() - 1;
154     bool Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc);
155     if (!Found && RawComments.size() >= 2) {
156       MaybeBeforeDecl--;
157       Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc);
158     }
159 
160     if (Found) {
161       Comment = MaybeBeforeDecl + 1;
162       assert(Comment == std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(),
163                                          &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare));
164     } else {
165       // Slow path.
166       Comment = std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(),
167                                  &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare);
168     }
169   }
170 
171   // Decompose the location for the declaration and find the beginning of the
172   // file buffer.
173   std::pair<FileID, unsigned> DeclLocDecomp = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc(DeclLoc);
174 
175   // First check whether we have a trailing comment.
176   if (Comment != RawComments.end() &&
177       (*Comment)->isDocumentation() && (*Comment)->isTrailingComment() &&
178       (isa<FieldDecl>(D) || isa<EnumConstantDecl>(D) || isa<VarDecl>(D))) {
179     std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentBeginDecomp
180       = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getBegin());
181     // Check that Doxygen trailing comment comes after the declaration, starts
182     // on the same line and in the same file as the declaration.
183     if (DeclLocDecomp.first == CommentBeginDecomp.first &&
184         SourceMgr.getLineNumber(DeclLocDecomp.first, DeclLocDecomp.second)
185           == SourceMgr.getLineNumber(CommentBeginDecomp.first,
186                                      CommentBeginDecomp.second)) {
187       return *Comment;
188     }
189   }
190 
191   // The comment just after the declaration was not a trailing comment.
192   // Let's look at the previous comment.
193   if (Comment == RawComments.begin())
194     return NULL;
195   --Comment;
196 
197   // Check that we actually have a non-member Doxygen comment.
198   if (!(*Comment)->isDocumentation() || (*Comment)->isTrailingComment())
199     return NULL;
200 
201   // Decompose the end of the comment.
202   std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentEndDecomp
203     = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getEnd());
204 
205   // If the comment and the declaration aren't in the same file, then they
206   // aren't related.
207   if (DeclLocDecomp.first != CommentEndDecomp.first)
208     return NULL;
209 
210   // Get the corresponding buffer.
211   bool Invalid = false;
212   const char *Buffer = SourceMgr.getBufferData(DeclLocDecomp.first,
213                                                &Invalid).data();
214   if (Invalid)
215     return NULL;
216 
217   // Extract text between the comment and declaration.
218   StringRef Text(Buffer + CommentEndDecomp.second,
219                  DeclLocDecomp.second - CommentEndDecomp.second);
220 
221   // There should be no other declarations or preprocessor directives between
222   // comment and declaration.
223   if (Text.find_first_of(",;{}#@") != StringRef::npos)
224     return NULL;
225 
226   return *Comment;
227 }
228 
229 namespace {
230 /// If we have a 'templated' declaration for a template, adjust 'D' to
231 /// refer to the actual template.
232 /// If we have an implicit instantiation, adjust 'D' to refer to template.
233 const Decl *adjustDeclToTemplate(const Decl *D) {
234   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
235     // Is this function declaration part of a function template?
236     if (const FunctionTemplateDecl *FTD = FD->getDescribedFunctionTemplate())
237       return FTD;
238 
239     // Nothing to do if function is not an implicit instantiation.
240     if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() != TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
241       return D;
242 
243     // Function is an implicit instantiation of a function template?
244     if (const FunctionTemplateDecl *FTD = FD->getPrimaryTemplate())
245       return FTD;
246 
247     // Function is instantiated from a member definition of a class template?
248     if (const FunctionDecl *MemberDecl =
249             FD->getInstantiatedFromMemberFunction())
250       return MemberDecl;
251 
252     return D;
253   }
254   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
255     // Static data member is instantiated from a member definition of a class
256     // template?
257     if (VD->isStaticDataMember())
258       if (const VarDecl *MemberDecl = VD->getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember())
259         return MemberDecl;
260 
261     return D;
262   }
263   if (const CXXRecordDecl *CRD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) {
264     // Is this class declaration part of a class template?
265     if (const ClassTemplateDecl *CTD = CRD->getDescribedClassTemplate())
266       return CTD;
267 
268     // Class is an implicit instantiation of a class template or partial
269     // specialization?
270     if (const ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *CTSD =
271             dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(CRD)) {
272       if (CTSD->getSpecializationKind() != TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
273         return D;
274       llvm::PointerUnion<ClassTemplateDecl *,
275                          ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl *>
276           PU = CTSD->getSpecializedTemplateOrPartial();
277       return PU.is<ClassTemplateDecl*>() ?
278           static_cast<const Decl*>(PU.get<ClassTemplateDecl *>()) :
279           static_cast<const Decl*>(
280               PU.get<ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl *>());
281     }
282 
283     // Class is instantiated from a member definition of a class template?
284     if (const MemberSpecializationInfo *Info =
285                    CRD->getMemberSpecializationInfo())
286       return Info->getInstantiatedFrom();
287 
288     return D;
289   }
290   if (const EnumDecl *ED = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(D)) {
291     // Enum is instantiated from a member definition of a class template?
292     if (const EnumDecl *MemberDecl = ED->getInstantiatedFromMemberEnum())
293       return MemberDecl;
294 
295     return D;
296   }
297   // FIXME: Adjust alias templates?
298   return D;
299 }
300 } // unnamed namespace
301 
302 const RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForAnyRedecl(
303                                                 const Decl *D,
304                                                 const Decl **OriginalDecl) const {
305   D = adjustDeclToTemplate(D);
306 
307   // Check whether we have cached a comment for this declaration already.
308   {
309     llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawCommentAndCacheFlags>::iterator Pos =
310         RedeclComments.find(D);
311     if (Pos != RedeclComments.end()) {
312       const RawCommentAndCacheFlags &Raw = Pos->second;
313       if (Raw.getKind() != RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl) {
314         if (OriginalDecl)
315           *OriginalDecl = Raw.getOriginalDecl();
316         return Raw.getRaw();
317       }
318     }
319   }
320 
321   // Search for comments attached to declarations in the redeclaration chain.
322   const RawComment *RC = NULL;
323   const Decl *OriginalDeclForRC = NULL;
324   for (Decl::redecl_iterator I = D->redecls_begin(),
325                              E = D->redecls_end();
326        I != E; ++I) {
327     llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawCommentAndCacheFlags>::iterator Pos =
328         RedeclComments.find(*I);
329     if (Pos != RedeclComments.end()) {
330       const RawCommentAndCacheFlags &Raw = Pos->second;
331       if (Raw.getKind() != RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl) {
332         RC = Raw.getRaw();
333         OriginalDeclForRC = Raw.getOriginalDecl();
334         break;
335       }
336     } else {
337       RC = getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(*I);
338       OriginalDeclForRC = *I;
339       RawCommentAndCacheFlags Raw;
340       if (RC) {
341         Raw.setRaw(RC);
342         Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::FromDecl);
343       } else
344         Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl);
345       Raw.setOriginalDecl(*I);
346       RedeclComments[*I] = Raw;
347       if (RC)
348         break;
349     }
350   }
351 
352   // If we found a comment, it should be a documentation comment.
353   assert(!RC || RC->isDocumentation());
354 
355   if (OriginalDecl)
356     *OriginalDecl = OriginalDeclForRC;
357 
358   // Update cache for every declaration in the redeclaration chain.
359   RawCommentAndCacheFlags Raw;
360   Raw.setRaw(RC);
361   Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::FromRedecl);
362   Raw.setOriginalDecl(OriginalDeclForRC);
363 
364   for (Decl::redecl_iterator I = D->redecls_begin(),
365                              E = D->redecls_end();
366        I != E; ++I) {
367     RawCommentAndCacheFlags &R = RedeclComments[*I];
368     if (R.getKind() == RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl)
369       R = Raw;
370   }
371 
372   return RC;
373 }
374 
375 static void addRedeclaredMethods(const ObjCMethodDecl *ObjCMethod,
376                    SmallVectorImpl<const NamedDecl *> &Redeclared) {
377   const DeclContext *DC = ObjCMethod->getDeclContext();
378   if (const ObjCImplDecl *IMD = dyn_cast<ObjCImplDecl>(DC)) {
379     const ObjCInterfaceDecl *ID = IMD->getClassInterface();
380     if (!ID)
381       return;
382     // Add redeclared method here.
383     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::known_extensions_iterator
384            Ext = ID->known_extensions_begin(),
385            ExtEnd = ID->known_extensions_end();
386          Ext != ExtEnd; ++Ext) {
387       if (ObjCMethodDecl *RedeclaredMethod =
388             Ext->getMethod(ObjCMethod->getSelector(),
389                                   ObjCMethod->isInstanceMethod()))
390         Redeclared.push_back(RedeclaredMethod);
391     }
392   }
393 }
394 
395 comments::FullComment *ASTContext::cloneFullComment(comments::FullComment *FC,
396                                                     const Decl *D) const {
397   comments::DeclInfo *ThisDeclInfo = new (*this) comments::DeclInfo;
398   ThisDeclInfo->CommentDecl = D;
399   ThisDeclInfo->IsFilled = false;
400   ThisDeclInfo->fill();
401   ThisDeclInfo->CommentDecl = FC->getDecl();
402   comments::FullComment *CFC =
403     new (*this) comments::FullComment(FC->getBlocks(),
404                                       ThisDeclInfo);
405   return CFC;
406 
407 }
408 
409 comments::FullComment *ASTContext::getCommentForDecl(
410                                               const Decl *D,
411                                               const Preprocessor *PP) const {
412   D = adjustDeclToTemplate(D);
413 
414   const Decl *Canonical = D->getCanonicalDecl();
415   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, comments::FullComment *>::iterator Pos =
416       ParsedComments.find(Canonical);
417 
418   if (Pos != ParsedComments.end()) {
419     if (Canonical != D) {
420       comments::FullComment *FC = Pos->second;
421       comments::FullComment *CFC = cloneFullComment(FC, D);
422       return CFC;
423     }
424     return Pos->second;
425   }
426 
427   const Decl *OriginalDecl;
428 
429   const RawComment *RC = getRawCommentForAnyRedecl(D, &OriginalDecl);
430   if (!RC) {
431     if (isa<ObjCMethodDecl>(D) || isa<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
432       SmallVector<const NamedDecl*, 8> Overridden;
433       const ObjCMethodDecl *OMD = dyn_cast<ObjCMethodDecl>(D);
434       if (OMD && OMD->isPropertyAccessor())
435         if (const ObjCPropertyDecl *PDecl = OMD->findPropertyDecl())
436           if (comments::FullComment *FC = getCommentForDecl(PDecl, PP))
437             return cloneFullComment(FC, D);
438       if (OMD)
439         addRedeclaredMethods(OMD, Overridden);
440       getOverriddenMethods(dyn_cast<NamedDecl>(D), Overridden);
441       for (unsigned i = 0, e = Overridden.size(); i < e; i++)
442         if (comments::FullComment *FC = getCommentForDecl(Overridden[i], PP))
443           return cloneFullComment(FC, D);
444     }
445     else if (const TypedefDecl *TD = dyn_cast<TypedefDecl>(D)) {
446       // Attach any tag type's documentation to its typedef if latter
447       // does not have one of its own.
448       QualType QT = TD->getUnderlyingType();
449       if (const TagType *TT = QT->getAs<TagType>())
450         if (const Decl *TD = TT->getDecl())
451           if (comments::FullComment *FC = getCommentForDecl(TD, PP))
452             return cloneFullComment(FC, D);
453     }
454     return NULL;
455   }
456 
457   // If the RawComment was attached to other redeclaration of this Decl, we
458   // should parse the comment in context of that other Decl.  This is important
459   // because comments can contain references to parameter names which can be
460   // different across redeclarations.
461   if (D != OriginalDecl)
462     return getCommentForDecl(OriginalDecl, PP);
463 
464   comments::FullComment *FC = RC->parse(*this, PP, D);
465   ParsedComments[Canonical] = FC;
466   return FC;
467 }
468 
469 void
470 ASTContext::CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID,
471                                                TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Parm) {
472   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getDepth());
473   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getPosition());
474   ID.AddBoolean(Parm->isParameterPack());
475 
476   TemplateParameterList *Params = Parm->getTemplateParameters();
477   ID.AddInteger(Params->size());
478   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),
479                                           PEnd = Params->end();
480        P != PEnd; ++P) {
481     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P)) {
482       ID.AddInteger(0);
483       ID.AddBoolean(TTP->isParameterPack());
484       continue;
485     }
486 
487     if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) {
488       ID.AddInteger(1);
489       ID.AddBoolean(NTTP->isParameterPack());
490       ID.AddPointer(NTTP->getType().getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr());
491       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) {
492         ID.AddBoolean(true);
493         ID.AddInteger(NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes());
494         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) {
495           QualType T = NTTP->getExpansionType(I);
496           ID.AddPointer(T.getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr());
497         }
498       } else
499         ID.AddBoolean(false);
500       continue;
501     }
502 
503     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP = cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P);
504     ID.AddInteger(2);
505     Profile(ID, TTP);
506   }
507 }
508 
509 TemplateTemplateParmDecl *
510 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(
511                                           TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP) const {
512   // Check if we already have a canonical template template parameter.
513   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
514   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(ID, TTP);
515   void *InsertPos = 0;
516   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm *Canonical
517     = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
518   if (Canonical)
519     return Canonical->getParam();
520 
521   // Build a canonical template parameter list.
522   TemplateParameterList *Params = TTP->getTemplateParameters();
523   SmallVector<NamedDecl *, 4> CanonParams;
524   CanonParams.reserve(Params->size());
525   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),
526                                           PEnd = Params->end();
527        P != PEnd; ++P) {
528     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P))
529       CanonParams.push_back(
530                   TemplateTypeParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
531                                                SourceLocation(),
532                                                SourceLocation(),
533                                                TTP->getDepth(),
534                                                TTP->getIndex(), 0, false,
535                                                TTP->isParameterPack()));
536     else if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP
537              = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) {
538       QualType T = getCanonicalType(NTTP->getType());
539       TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
540       NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *Param;
541       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) {
542         SmallVector<QualType, 2> ExpandedTypes;
543         SmallVector<TypeSourceInfo *, 2> ExpandedTInfos;
544         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) {
545           ExpandedTypes.push_back(getCanonicalType(NTTP->getExpansionType(I)));
546           ExpandedTInfos.push_back(
547                                 getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(ExpandedTypes.back()));
548         }
549 
550         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
551                                                 SourceLocation(),
552                                                 SourceLocation(),
553                                                 NTTP->getDepth(),
554                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,
555                                                 T,
556                                                 TInfo,
557                                                 ExpandedTypes.data(),
558                                                 ExpandedTypes.size(),
559                                                 ExpandedTInfos.data());
560       } else {
561         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
562                                                 SourceLocation(),
563                                                 SourceLocation(),
564                                                 NTTP->getDepth(),
565                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,
566                                                 T,
567                                                 NTTP->isParameterPack(),
568                                                 TInfo);
569       }
570       CanonParams.push_back(Param);
571 
572     } else
573       CanonParams.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(
574                                            cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P)));
575   }
576 
577   TemplateTemplateParmDecl *CanonTTP
578     = TemplateTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
579                                        SourceLocation(), TTP->getDepth(),
580                                        TTP->getPosition(),
581                                        TTP->isParameterPack(),
582                                        0,
583                          TemplateParameterList::Create(*this, SourceLocation(),
584                                                        SourceLocation(),
585                                                        CanonParams.data(),
586                                                        CanonParams.size(),
587                                                        SourceLocation()));
588 
589   // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
590   Canonical = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
591   assert(Canonical == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!");
592   (void)Canonical;
593 
594   // Create the canonical template template parameter entry.
595   Canonical = new (*this) CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm(CanonTTP);
596   CanonTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(Canonical, InsertPos);
597   return CanonTTP;
598 }
599 
600 CXXABI *ASTContext::createCXXABI(const TargetInfo &T) {
601   if (!LangOpts.CPlusPlus) return 0;
602 
603   switch (T.getCXXABI().getKind()) {
604   case TargetCXXABI::GenericARM:
605   case TargetCXXABI::iOS:
606     return CreateARMCXXABI(*this);
607   case TargetCXXABI::GenericAArch64: // Same as Itanium at this level
608   case TargetCXXABI::GenericItanium:
609     return CreateItaniumCXXABI(*this);
610   case TargetCXXABI::Microsoft:
611     return CreateMicrosoftCXXABI(*this);
612   }
613   llvm_unreachable("Invalid CXXABI type!");
614 }
615 
616 static const LangAS::Map *getAddressSpaceMap(const TargetInfo &T,
617                                              const LangOptions &LOpts) {
618   if (LOpts.FakeAddressSpaceMap) {
619     // The fake address space map must have a distinct entry for each
620     // language-specific address space.
621     static const unsigned FakeAddrSpaceMap[] = {
622       1, // opencl_global
623       2, // opencl_local
624       3, // opencl_constant
625       4, // cuda_device
626       5, // cuda_constant
627       6  // cuda_shared
628     };
629     return &FakeAddrSpaceMap;
630   } else {
631     return &T.getAddressSpaceMap();
632   }
633 }
634 
635 ASTContext::ASTContext(LangOptions& LOpts, SourceManager &SM,
636                        const TargetInfo *t,
637                        IdentifierTable &idents, SelectorTable &sels,
638                        Builtin::Context &builtins,
639                        unsigned size_reserve,
640                        bool DelayInitialization)
641   : FunctionProtoTypes(this_()),
642     TemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()),
643     DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()),
644     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks(this_()),
645     GlobalNestedNameSpecifier(0),
646     Int128Decl(0), UInt128Decl(0),
647     BuiltinVaListDecl(0),
648     ObjCIdDecl(0), ObjCSelDecl(0), ObjCClassDecl(0), ObjCProtocolClassDecl(0),
649     BOOLDecl(0),
650     CFConstantStringTypeDecl(0), ObjCInstanceTypeDecl(0),
651     FILEDecl(0),
652     jmp_bufDecl(0), sigjmp_bufDecl(0), ucontext_tDecl(0),
653     BlockDescriptorType(0), BlockDescriptorExtendedType(0),
654     cudaConfigureCallDecl(0),
655     NullTypeSourceInfo(QualType()),
656     FirstLocalImport(), LastLocalImport(),
657     SourceMgr(SM), LangOpts(LOpts),
658     AddrSpaceMap(0), Target(t), PrintingPolicy(LOpts),
659     Idents(idents), Selectors(sels),
660     BuiltinInfo(builtins),
661     DeclarationNames(*this),
662     ExternalSource(0), Listener(0),
663     Comments(SM), CommentsLoaded(false),
664     CommentCommandTraits(BumpAlloc, LOpts.CommentOpts),
665     LastSDM(0, 0),
666     UniqueBlockByRefTypeID(0)
667 {
668   if (size_reserve > 0) Types.reserve(size_reserve);
669   TUDecl = TranslationUnitDecl::Create(*this);
670 
671   if (!DelayInitialization) {
672     assert(t && "No target supplied for ASTContext initialization");
673     InitBuiltinTypes(*t);
674   }
675 }
676 
677 ASTContext::~ASTContext() {
678   // Release the DenseMaps associated with DeclContext objects.
679   // FIXME: Is this the ideal solution?
680   ReleaseDeclContextMaps();
681 
682   // Call all of the deallocation functions.
683   for (unsigned I = 0, N = Deallocations.size(); I != N; ++I)
684     Deallocations[I].first(Deallocations[I].second);
685 
686   // ASTRecordLayout objects in ASTRecordLayouts must always be destroyed
687   // because they can contain DenseMaps.
688   for (llvm::DenseMap<const ObjCContainerDecl*,
689        const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator
690        I = ObjCLayouts.begin(), E = ObjCLayouts.end(); I != E; )
691     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory.
692     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second))
693       R->Destroy(*this);
694 
695   for (llvm::DenseMap<const RecordDecl*, const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator
696        I = ASTRecordLayouts.begin(), E = ASTRecordLayouts.end(); I != E; ) {
697     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory.
698     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second))
699       R->Destroy(*this);
700   }
701 
702   for (llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator A = DeclAttrs.begin(),
703                                                     AEnd = DeclAttrs.end();
704        A != AEnd; ++A)
705     A->second->~AttrVec();
706 }
707 
708 void ASTContext::AddDeallocation(void (*Callback)(void*), void *Data) {
709   Deallocations.push_back(std::make_pair(Callback, Data));
710 }
711 
712 void
713 ASTContext::setExternalSource(OwningPtr<ExternalASTSource> &Source) {
714   ExternalSource.reset(Source.take());
715 }
716 
717 void ASTContext::PrintStats() const {
718   llvm::errs() << "\n*** AST Context Stats:\n";
719   llvm::errs() << "  " << Types.size() << " types total.\n";
720 
721   unsigned counts[] = {
722 #define TYPE(Name, Parent) 0,
723 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent)
724 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
725     0 // Extra
726   };
727 
728   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Types.size(); i != e; ++i) {
729     Type *T = Types[i];
730     counts[(unsigned)T->getTypeClass()]++;
731   }
732 
733   unsigned Idx = 0;
734   unsigned TotalBytes = 0;
735 #define TYPE(Name, Parent)                                              \
736   if (counts[Idx])                                                      \
737     llvm::errs() << "    " << counts[Idx] << " " << #Name               \
738                  << " types\n";                                         \
739   TotalBytes += counts[Idx] * sizeof(Name##Type);                       \
740   ++Idx;
741 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent)
742 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
743 
744   llvm::errs() << "Total bytes = " << TotalBytes << "\n";
745 
746   // Implicit special member functions.
747   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared << "/"
748                << NumImplicitDefaultConstructors
749                << " implicit default constructors created\n";
750   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared << "/"
751                << NumImplicitCopyConstructors
752                << " implicit copy constructors created\n";
753   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
754     llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared << "/"
755                  << NumImplicitMoveConstructors
756                  << " implicit move constructors created\n";
757   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/"
758                << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators
759                << " implicit copy assignment operators created\n";
760   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
761     llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/"
762                  << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators
763                  << " implicit move assignment operators created\n";
764   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared << "/"
765                << NumImplicitDestructors
766                << " implicit destructors created\n";
767 
768   if (ExternalSource.get()) {
769     llvm::errs() << "\n";
770     ExternalSource->PrintStats();
771   }
772 
773   BumpAlloc.PrintStats();
774 }
775 
776 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getInt128Decl() const {
777   if (!Int128Decl) {
778     TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(Int128Ty);
779     Int128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
780                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
781                                      SourceLocation(),
782                                      SourceLocation(),
783                                      &Idents.get("__int128_t"),
784                                      TInfo);
785   }
786 
787   return Int128Decl;
788 }
789 
790 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getUInt128Decl() const {
791   if (!UInt128Decl) {
792     TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(UnsignedInt128Ty);
793     UInt128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
794                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
795                                      SourceLocation(),
796                                      SourceLocation(),
797                                      &Idents.get("__uint128_t"),
798                                      TInfo);
799   }
800 
801   return UInt128Decl;
802 }
803 
804 void ASTContext::InitBuiltinType(CanQualType &R, BuiltinType::Kind K) {
805   BuiltinType *Ty = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BuiltinType(K);
806   R = CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(QualType(Ty, 0));
807   Types.push_back(Ty);
808 }
809 
810 void ASTContext::InitBuiltinTypes(const TargetInfo &Target) {
811   assert((!this->Target || this->Target == &Target) &&
812          "Incorrect target reinitialization");
813   assert(VoidTy.isNull() && "Context reinitialized?");
814 
815   this->Target = &Target;
816 
817   ABI.reset(createCXXABI(Target));
818   AddrSpaceMap = getAddressSpaceMap(Target, LangOpts);
819 
820   // C99 6.2.5p19.
821   InitBuiltinType(VoidTy,              BuiltinType::Void);
822 
823   // C99 6.2.5p2.
824   InitBuiltinType(BoolTy,              BuiltinType::Bool);
825   // C99 6.2.5p3.
826   if (LangOpts.CharIsSigned)
827     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_S);
828   else
829     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_U);
830   // C99 6.2.5p4.
831   InitBuiltinType(SignedCharTy,        BuiltinType::SChar);
832   InitBuiltinType(ShortTy,             BuiltinType::Short);
833   InitBuiltinType(IntTy,               BuiltinType::Int);
834   InitBuiltinType(LongTy,              BuiltinType::Long);
835   InitBuiltinType(LongLongTy,          BuiltinType::LongLong);
836 
837   // C99 6.2.5p6.
838   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedCharTy,      BuiltinType::UChar);
839   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedShortTy,     BuiltinType::UShort);
840   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedIntTy,       BuiltinType::UInt);
841   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongTy,      BuiltinType::ULong);
842   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongLongTy,  BuiltinType::ULongLong);
843 
844   // C99 6.2.5p10.
845   InitBuiltinType(FloatTy,             BuiltinType::Float);
846   InitBuiltinType(DoubleTy,            BuiltinType::Double);
847   InitBuiltinType(LongDoubleTy,        BuiltinType::LongDouble);
848 
849   // GNU extension, 128-bit integers.
850   InitBuiltinType(Int128Ty,            BuiltinType::Int128);
851   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedInt128Ty,    BuiltinType::UInt128);
852 
853   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus && LangOpts.WChar) { // C++ 3.9.1p5
854     if (TargetInfo::isTypeSigned(Target.getWCharType()))
855       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_S);
856     else  // -fshort-wchar makes wchar_t be unsigned.
857       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_U);
858   } else // C99 (or C++ using -fno-wchar)
859     WCharTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWCharType());
860 
861   WIntTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWIntType());
862 
863   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++
864     InitBuiltinType(Char16Ty,           BuiltinType::Char16);
865   else // C99
866     Char16Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar16Type());
867 
868   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++
869     InitBuiltinType(Char32Ty,           BuiltinType::Char32);
870   else // C99
871     Char32Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar32Type());
872 
873   // Placeholder type for type-dependent expressions whose type is
874   // completely unknown. No code should ever check a type against
875   // DependentTy and users should never see it; however, it is here to
876   // help diagnose failures to properly check for type-dependent
877   // expressions.
878   InitBuiltinType(DependentTy,         BuiltinType::Dependent);
879 
880   // Placeholder type for functions.
881   InitBuiltinType(OverloadTy,          BuiltinType::Overload);
882 
883   // Placeholder type for bound members.
884   InitBuiltinType(BoundMemberTy,       BuiltinType::BoundMember);
885 
886   // Placeholder type for pseudo-objects.
887   InitBuiltinType(PseudoObjectTy,      BuiltinType::PseudoObject);
888 
889   // "any" type; useful for debugger-like clients.
890   InitBuiltinType(UnknownAnyTy,        BuiltinType::UnknownAny);
891 
892   // Placeholder type for unbridged ARC casts.
893   InitBuiltinType(ARCUnbridgedCastTy,  BuiltinType::ARCUnbridgedCast);
894 
895   // Placeholder type for builtin functions.
896   InitBuiltinType(BuiltinFnTy,  BuiltinType::BuiltinFn);
897 
898   // C99 6.2.5p11.
899   FloatComplexTy      = getComplexType(FloatTy);
900   DoubleComplexTy     = getComplexType(DoubleTy);
901   LongDoubleComplexTy = getComplexType(LongDoubleTy);
902 
903   // Builtin types for 'id', 'Class', and 'SEL'.
904   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, BuiltinType::ObjCId);
905   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, BuiltinType::ObjCClass);
906   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy, BuiltinType::ObjCSel);
907 
908   if (LangOpts.OpenCL) {
909     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage1dTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage1d);
910     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage1dArrayTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage1dArray);
911     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage1dBufferTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage1dBuffer);
912     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage2dTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage2d);
913     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage2dArrayTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage2dArray);
914     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage3dTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage3d);
915 
916     InitBuiltinType(OCLSamplerTy, BuiltinType::OCLSampler);
917     InitBuiltinType(OCLEventTy, BuiltinType::OCLEvent);
918   }
919 
920   // Builtin type for __objc_yes and __objc_no
921   ObjCBuiltinBoolTy = (Target.useSignedCharForObjCBool() ?
922                        SignedCharTy : BoolTy);
923 
924   ObjCConstantStringType = QualType();
925 
926   ObjCSuperType = QualType();
927 
928   // void * type
929   VoidPtrTy = getPointerType(VoidTy);
930 
931   // nullptr type (C++0x 2.14.7)
932   InitBuiltinType(NullPtrTy,           BuiltinType::NullPtr);
933 
934   // half type (OpenCL 6.1.1.1) / ARM NEON __fp16
935   InitBuiltinType(HalfTy, BuiltinType::Half);
936 
937   // Builtin type used to help define __builtin_va_list.
938   VaListTagTy = QualType();
939 }
940 
941 DiagnosticsEngine &ASTContext::getDiagnostics() const {
942   return SourceMgr.getDiagnostics();
943 }
944 
945 AttrVec& ASTContext::getDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) {
946   AttrVec *&Result = DeclAttrs[D];
947   if (!Result) {
948     void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(AttrVec));
949     Result = new (Mem) AttrVec;
950   }
951 
952   return *Result;
953 }
954 
955 /// \brief Erase the attributes corresponding to the given declaration.
956 void ASTContext::eraseDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) {
957   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator Pos = DeclAttrs.find(D);
958   if (Pos != DeclAttrs.end()) {
959     Pos->second->~AttrVec();
960     DeclAttrs.erase(Pos);
961   }
962 }
963 
964 MemberSpecializationInfo *
965 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(const VarDecl *Var) {
966   assert(Var->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
967   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl *, MemberSpecializationInfo *>::iterator Pos
968     = InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.find(Var);
969   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.end())
970     return 0;
971 
972   return Pos->second;
973 }
974 
975 void
976 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(VarDecl *Inst, VarDecl *Tmpl,
977                                                 TemplateSpecializationKind TSK,
978                                           SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation) {
979   assert(Inst->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
980   assert(Tmpl->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
981   assert(!InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst] &&
982          "Already noted what static data member was instantiated from");
983   InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst]
984     = new (*this) MemberSpecializationInfo(Tmpl, TSK, PointOfInstantiation);
985 }
986 
987 FunctionDecl *ASTContext::getClassScopeSpecializationPattern(
988                                                      const FunctionDecl *FD){
989   assert(FD && "Specialization is 0");
990   llvm::DenseMap<const FunctionDecl*, FunctionDecl *>::const_iterator Pos
991     = ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.find(FD);
992   if (Pos == ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.end())
993     return 0;
994 
995   return Pos->second;
996 }
997 
998 void ASTContext::setClassScopeSpecializationPattern(FunctionDecl *FD,
999                                         FunctionDecl *Pattern) {
1000   assert(FD && "Specialization is 0");
1001   assert(Pattern && "Class scope specialization pattern is 0");
1002   ClassScopeSpecializationPattern[FD] = Pattern;
1003 }
1004 
1005 NamedDecl *
1006 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *UUD) {
1007   llvm::DenseMap<UsingDecl *, NamedDecl *>::const_iterator Pos
1008     = InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.find(UUD);
1009   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.end())
1010     return 0;
1011 
1012   return Pos->second;
1013 }
1014 
1015 void
1016 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *Inst, NamedDecl *Pattern) {
1017   assert((isa<UsingDecl>(Pattern) ||
1018           isa<UnresolvedUsingValueDecl>(Pattern) ||
1019           isa<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Pattern)) &&
1020          "pattern decl is not a using decl");
1021   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists");
1022   InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] = Pattern;
1023 }
1024 
1025 UsingShadowDecl *
1026 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst) {
1027   llvm::DenseMap<UsingShadowDecl*, UsingShadowDecl*>::const_iterator Pos
1028     = InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.find(Inst);
1029   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.end())
1030     return 0;
1031 
1032   return Pos->second;
1033 }
1034 
1035 void
1036 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst,
1037                                                UsingShadowDecl *Pattern) {
1038   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists");
1039   InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] = Pattern;
1040 }
1041 
1042 FieldDecl *ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Field) {
1043   llvm::DenseMap<FieldDecl *, FieldDecl *>::iterator Pos
1044     = InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.find(Field);
1045   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.end())
1046     return 0;
1047 
1048   return Pos->second;
1049 }
1050 
1051 void ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Inst,
1052                                                      FieldDecl *Tmpl) {
1053   assert(!Inst->getDeclName() && "Instantiated field decl is not unnamed");
1054   assert(!Tmpl->getDeclName() && "Template field decl is not unnamed");
1055   assert(!InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] &&
1056          "Already noted what unnamed field was instantiated from");
1057 
1058   InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] = Tmpl;
1059 }
1060 
1061 bool ASTContext::ZeroBitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
1062                                     const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
1063   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && !LastFD->isBitField() &&
1064           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) == 0);
1065 }
1066 
1067 bool ASTContext::ZeroBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
1068                                              const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
1069   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
1070           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) == 0 &&
1071           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this) != 0);
1072 }
1073 
1074 bool ASTContext::BitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
1075                                          const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
1076   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
1077           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) &&
1078           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
1079 }
1080 
1081 bool ASTContext::NonBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
1082                                          const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
1083   return (!FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
1084           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
1085 }
1086 
1087 bool ASTContext::BitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
1088                                              const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
1089   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && !LastFD->isBitField() &&
1090           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
1091 }
1092 
1093 ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator
1094 ASTContext::overridden_methods_begin(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
1095   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
1096     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method->getCanonicalDecl());
1097   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
1098     return 0;
1099 
1100   return Pos->second.begin();
1101 }
1102 
1103 ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator
1104 ASTContext::overridden_methods_end(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
1105   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
1106     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method->getCanonicalDecl());
1107   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
1108     return 0;
1109 
1110   return Pos->second.end();
1111 }
1112 
1113 unsigned
1114 ASTContext::overridden_methods_size(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
1115   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
1116     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method->getCanonicalDecl());
1117   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
1118     return 0;
1119 
1120   return Pos->second.size();
1121 }
1122 
1123 void ASTContext::addOverriddenMethod(const CXXMethodDecl *Method,
1124                                      const CXXMethodDecl *Overridden) {
1125   assert(Method->isCanonicalDecl() && Overridden->isCanonicalDecl());
1126   OverriddenMethods[Method].push_back(Overridden);
1127 }
1128 
1129 void ASTContext::getOverriddenMethods(
1130                       const NamedDecl *D,
1131                       SmallVectorImpl<const NamedDecl *> &Overridden) const {
1132   assert(D);
1133 
1134   if (const CXXMethodDecl *CXXMethod = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(D)) {
1135     Overridden.append(overridden_methods_begin(CXXMethod),
1136                       overridden_methods_end(CXXMethod));
1137     return;
1138   }
1139 
1140   const ObjCMethodDecl *Method = dyn_cast<ObjCMethodDecl>(D);
1141   if (!Method)
1142     return;
1143 
1144   SmallVector<const ObjCMethodDecl *, 8> OverDecls;
1145   Method->getOverriddenMethods(OverDecls);
1146   Overridden.append(OverDecls.begin(), OverDecls.end());
1147 }
1148 
1149 void ASTContext::addedLocalImportDecl(ImportDecl *Import) {
1150   assert(!Import->NextLocalImport && "Import declaration already in the chain");
1151   assert(!Import->isFromASTFile() && "Non-local import declaration");
1152   if (!FirstLocalImport) {
1153     FirstLocalImport = Import;
1154     LastLocalImport = Import;
1155     return;
1156   }
1157 
1158   LastLocalImport->NextLocalImport = Import;
1159   LastLocalImport = Import;
1160 }
1161 
1162 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1163 //                         Type Sizing and Analysis
1164 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1165 
1166 /// getFloatTypeSemantics - Return the APFloat 'semantics' for the specified
1167 /// scalar floating point type.
1168 const llvm::fltSemantics &ASTContext::getFloatTypeSemantics(QualType T) const {
1169   const BuiltinType *BT = T->getAs<BuiltinType>();
1170   assert(BT && "Not a floating point type!");
1171   switch (BT->getKind()) {
1172   default: llvm_unreachable("Not a floating point type!");
1173   case BuiltinType::Half:       return Target->getHalfFormat();
1174   case BuiltinType::Float:      return Target->getFloatFormat();
1175   case BuiltinType::Double:     return Target->getDoubleFormat();
1176   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return Target->getLongDoubleFormat();
1177   }
1178 }
1179 
1180 /// getDeclAlign - Return a conservative estimate of the alignment of the
1181 /// specified decl.  Note that bitfields do not have a valid alignment, so
1182 /// this method will assert on them.
1183 /// If @p RefAsPointee, references are treated like their underlying type
1184 /// (for alignof), else they're treated like pointers (for CodeGen).
1185 CharUnits ASTContext::getDeclAlign(const Decl *D, bool RefAsPointee) const {
1186   unsigned Align = Target->getCharWidth();
1187 
1188   bool UseAlignAttrOnly = false;
1189   if (unsigned AlignFromAttr = D->getMaxAlignment()) {
1190     Align = AlignFromAttr;
1191 
1192     // __attribute__((aligned)) can increase or decrease alignment
1193     // *except* on a struct or struct member, where it only increases
1194     // alignment unless 'packed' is also specified.
1195     //
1196     // It is an error for alignas to decrease alignment, so we can
1197     // ignore that possibility;  Sema should diagnose it.
1198     if (isa<FieldDecl>(D)) {
1199       UseAlignAttrOnly = D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() ||
1200         cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>();
1201     } else {
1202       UseAlignAttrOnly = true;
1203     }
1204   }
1205   else if (isa<FieldDecl>(D))
1206       UseAlignAttrOnly =
1207         D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() ||
1208         cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>();
1209 
1210   // If we're using the align attribute only, just ignore everything
1211   // else about the declaration and its type.
1212   if (UseAlignAttrOnly) {
1213     // do nothing
1214 
1215   } else if (const ValueDecl *VD = dyn_cast<ValueDecl>(D)) {
1216     QualType T = VD->getType();
1217     if (const ReferenceType* RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>()) {
1218       if (RefAsPointee)
1219         T = RT->getPointeeType();
1220       else
1221         T = getPointerType(RT->getPointeeType());
1222     }
1223     if (!T->isIncompleteType() && !T->isFunctionType()) {
1224       // Adjust alignments of declarations with array type by the
1225       // large-array alignment on the target.
1226       unsigned MinWidth = Target->getLargeArrayMinWidth();
1227       const ArrayType *arrayType;
1228       if (MinWidth && (arrayType = getAsArrayType(T))) {
1229         if (isa<VariableArrayType>(arrayType))
1230           Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign());
1231         else if (isa<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType) &&
1232                  MinWidth <= getTypeSize(cast<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType)))
1233           Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign());
1234 
1235         // Walk through any array types while we're at it.
1236         T = getBaseElementType(arrayType);
1237       }
1238       Align = std::max(Align, getPreferredTypeAlign(T.getTypePtr()));
1239     }
1240 
1241     // Fields can be subject to extra alignment constraints, like if
1242     // the field is packed, the struct is packed, or the struct has a
1243     // a max-field-alignment constraint (#pragma pack).  So calculate
1244     // the actual alignment of the field within the struct, and then
1245     // (as we're expected to) constrain that by the alignment of the type.
1246     if (const FieldDecl *field = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(VD)) {
1247       // So calculate the alignment of the field.
1248       const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(field->getParent());
1249 
1250       // Start with the record's overall alignment.
1251       unsigned fieldAlign = toBits(layout.getAlignment());
1252 
1253       // Use the GCD of that and the offset within the record.
1254       uint64_t offset = layout.getFieldOffset(field->getFieldIndex());
1255       if (offset > 0) {
1256         // Alignment is always a power of 2, so the GCD will be a power of 2,
1257         // which means we get to do this crazy thing instead of Euclid's.
1258         uint64_t lowBitOfOffset = offset & (~offset + 1);
1259         if (lowBitOfOffset < fieldAlign)
1260           fieldAlign = static_cast<unsigned>(lowBitOfOffset);
1261       }
1262 
1263       Align = std::min(Align, fieldAlign);
1264     }
1265   }
1266 
1267   return toCharUnitsFromBits(Align);
1268 }
1269 
1270 // getTypeInfoDataSizeInChars - Return the size of a type, in
1271 // chars. If the type is a record, its data size is returned.  This is
1272 // the size of the memcpy that's performed when assigning this type
1273 // using a trivial copy/move assignment operator.
1274 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
1275 ASTContext::getTypeInfoDataSizeInChars(QualType T) const {
1276   std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> sizeAndAlign = getTypeInfoInChars(T);
1277 
1278   // In C++, objects can sometimes be allocated into the tail padding
1279   // of a base-class subobject.  We decide whether that's possible
1280   // during class layout, so here we can just trust the layout results.
1281   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) {
1282     if (const RecordType *RT = T->getAs<RecordType>()) {
1283       const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl());
1284       sizeAndAlign.first = layout.getDataSize();
1285     }
1286   }
1287 
1288   return sizeAndAlign;
1289 }
1290 
1291 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
1292 ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(const Type *T) const {
1293   std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfo(T);
1294   return std::make_pair(toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.first),
1295                         toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.second));
1296 }
1297 
1298 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
1299 ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(QualType T) const {
1300   return getTypeInfoInChars(T.getTypePtr());
1301 }
1302 
1303 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> ASTContext::getTypeInfo(const Type *T) const {
1304   TypeInfoMap::iterator it = MemoizedTypeInfo.find(T);
1305   if (it != MemoizedTypeInfo.end())
1306     return it->second;
1307 
1308   std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfoImpl(T);
1309   MemoizedTypeInfo.insert(std::make_pair(T, Info));
1310   return Info;
1311 }
1312 
1313 /// getTypeInfoImpl - Return the size of the specified type, in bits.  This
1314 /// method does not work on incomplete types.
1315 ///
1316 /// FIXME: Pointers into different addr spaces could have different sizes and
1317 /// alignment requirements: getPointerInfo should take an AddrSpace, this
1318 /// should take a QualType, &c.
1319 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned>
1320 ASTContext::getTypeInfoImpl(const Type *T) const {
1321   uint64_t Width=0;
1322   unsigned Align=8;
1323   switch (T->getTypeClass()) {
1324 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
1325 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
1326 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base)
1327 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
1328 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
1329     llvm_unreachable("Should not see dependent types");
1330 
1331   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
1332   case Type::FunctionProto:
1333     // GCC extension: alignof(function) = 32 bits
1334     Width = 0;
1335     Align = 32;
1336     break;
1337 
1338   case Type::IncompleteArray:
1339   case Type::VariableArray:
1340     Width = 0;
1341     Align = getTypeAlign(cast<ArrayType>(T)->getElementType());
1342     break;
1343 
1344   case Type::ConstantArray: {
1345     const ConstantArrayType *CAT = cast<ConstantArrayType>(T);
1346 
1347     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(CAT->getElementType());
1348     uint64_t Size = CAT->getSize().getZExtValue();
1349     assert((Size == 0 || EltInfo.first <= (uint64_t)(-1)/Size) &&
1350            "Overflow in array type bit size evaluation");
1351     Width = EltInfo.first*Size;
1352     Align = EltInfo.second;
1353     Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align);
1354     break;
1355   }
1356   case Type::ExtVector:
1357   case Type::Vector: {
1358     const VectorType *VT = cast<VectorType>(T);
1359     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(VT->getElementType());
1360     Width = EltInfo.first*VT->getNumElements();
1361     Align = Width;
1362     // If the alignment is not a power of 2, round up to the next power of 2.
1363     // This happens for non-power-of-2 length vectors.
1364     if (Align & (Align-1)) {
1365       Align = llvm::NextPowerOf2(Align);
1366       Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align);
1367     }
1368     // Adjust the alignment based on the target max.
1369     uint64_t TargetVectorAlign = Target->getMaxVectorAlign();
1370     if (TargetVectorAlign && TargetVectorAlign < Align)
1371       Align = TargetVectorAlign;
1372     break;
1373   }
1374 
1375   case Type::Builtin:
1376     switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) {
1377     default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type!");
1378     case BuiltinType::Void:
1379       // GCC extension: alignof(void) = 8 bits.
1380       Width = 0;
1381       Align = 8;
1382       break;
1383 
1384     case BuiltinType::Bool:
1385       Width = Target->getBoolWidth();
1386       Align = Target->getBoolAlign();
1387       break;
1388     case BuiltinType::Char_S:
1389     case BuiltinType::Char_U:
1390     case BuiltinType::UChar:
1391     case BuiltinType::SChar:
1392       Width = Target->getCharWidth();
1393       Align = Target->getCharAlign();
1394       break;
1395     case BuiltinType::WChar_S:
1396     case BuiltinType::WChar_U:
1397       Width = Target->getWCharWidth();
1398       Align = Target->getWCharAlign();
1399       break;
1400     case BuiltinType::Char16:
1401       Width = Target->getChar16Width();
1402       Align = Target->getChar16Align();
1403       break;
1404     case BuiltinType::Char32:
1405       Width = Target->getChar32Width();
1406       Align = Target->getChar32Align();
1407       break;
1408     case BuiltinType::UShort:
1409     case BuiltinType::Short:
1410       Width = Target->getShortWidth();
1411       Align = Target->getShortAlign();
1412       break;
1413     case BuiltinType::UInt:
1414     case BuiltinType::Int:
1415       Width = Target->getIntWidth();
1416       Align = Target->getIntAlign();
1417       break;
1418     case BuiltinType::ULong:
1419     case BuiltinType::Long:
1420       Width = Target->getLongWidth();
1421       Align = Target->getLongAlign();
1422       break;
1423     case BuiltinType::ULongLong:
1424     case BuiltinType::LongLong:
1425       Width = Target->getLongLongWidth();
1426       Align = Target->getLongLongAlign();
1427       break;
1428     case BuiltinType::Int128:
1429     case BuiltinType::UInt128:
1430       Width = 128;
1431       Align = 128; // int128_t is 128-bit aligned on all targets.
1432       break;
1433     case BuiltinType::Half:
1434       Width = Target->getHalfWidth();
1435       Align = Target->getHalfAlign();
1436       break;
1437     case BuiltinType::Float:
1438       Width = Target->getFloatWidth();
1439       Align = Target->getFloatAlign();
1440       break;
1441     case BuiltinType::Double:
1442       Width = Target->getDoubleWidth();
1443       Align = Target->getDoubleAlign();
1444       break;
1445     case BuiltinType::LongDouble:
1446       Width = Target->getLongDoubleWidth();
1447       Align = Target->getLongDoubleAlign();
1448       break;
1449     case BuiltinType::NullPtr:
1450       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0); // C++ 3.9.1p11: sizeof(nullptr_t)
1451       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0); //   == sizeof(void*)
1452       break;
1453     case BuiltinType::ObjCId:
1454     case BuiltinType::ObjCClass:
1455     case BuiltinType::ObjCSel:
1456       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1457       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1458       break;
1459     case BuiltinType::OCLSampler:
1460       // Samplers are modeled as integers.
1461       Width = Target->getIntWidth();
1462       Align = Target->getIntAlign();
1463       break;
1464     case BuiltinType::OCLEvent:
1465     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1d:
1466     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dArray:
1467     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dBuffer:
1468     case BuiltinType::OCLImage2d:
1469     case BuiltinType::OCLImage2dArray:
1470     case BuiltinType::OCLImage3d:
1471       // Currently these types are pointers to opaque types.
1472       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1473       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1474       break;
1475     }
1476     break;
1477   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer:
1478     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1479     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1480     break;
1481   case Type::BlockPointer: {
1482     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(
1483         cast<BlockPointerType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1484     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1485     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1486     break;
1487   }
1488   case Type::LValueReference:
1489   case Type::RValueReference: {
1490     // alignof and sizeof should never enter this code path here, so we go
1491     // the pointer route.
1492     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(
1493         cast<ReferenceType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1494     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1495     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1496     break;
1497   }
1498   case Type::Pointer: {
1499     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(cast<PointerType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1500     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1501     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1502     break;
1503   }
1504   case Type::MemberPointer: {
1505     const MemberPointerType *MPT = cast<MemberPointerType>(T);
1506     llvm::tie(Width, Align) = ABI->getMemberPointerWidthAndAlign(MPT);
1507     break;
1508   }
1509   case Type::Complex: {
1510     // Complex types have the same alignment as their elements, but twice the
1511     // size.
1512     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo =
1513       getTypeInfo(cast<ComplexType>(T)->getElementType());
1514     Width = EltInfo.first*2;
1515     Align = EltInfo.second;
1516     break;
1517   }
1518   case Type::ObjCObject:
1519     return getTypeInfo(cast<ObjCObjectType>(T)->getBaseType().getTypePtr());
1520   case Type::ObjCInterface: {
1521     const ObjCInterfaceType *ObjCI = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(T);
1522     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(ObjCI->getDecl());
1523     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize());
1524     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment());
1525     break;
1526   }
1527   case Type::Record:
1528   case Type::Enum: {
1529     const TagType *TT = cast<TagType>(T);
1530 
1531     if (TT->getDecl()->isInvalidDecl()) {
1532       Width = 8;
1533       Align = 8;
1534       break;
1535     }
1536 
1537     if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(TT))
1538       return getTypeInfo(ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType());
1539 
1540     const RecordType *RT = cast<RecordType>(TT);
1541     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl());
1542     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize());
1543     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment());
1544     break;
1545   }
1546 
1547   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParm:
1548     return getTypeInfo(cast<SubstTemplateTypeParmType>(T)->
1549                        getReplacementType().getTypePtr());
1550 
1551   case Type::Auto: {
1552     const AutoType *A = cast<AutoType>(T);
1553     assert(A->isDeduced() && "Cannot request the size of a dependent type");
1554     return getTypeInfo(A->getDeducedType().getTypePtr());
1555   }
1556 
1557   case Type::Paren:
1558     return getTypeInfo(cast<ParenType>(T)->getInnerType().getTypePtr());
1559 
1560   case Type::Typedef: {
1561     const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = cast<TypedefType>(T)->getDecl();
1562     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info
1563       = getTypeInfo(Typedef->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr());
1564     // If the typedef has an aligned attribute on it, it overrides any computed
1565     // alignment we have.  This violates the GCC documentation (which says that
1566     // attribute(aligned) can only round up) but matches its implementation.
1567     if (unsigned AttrAlign = Typedef->getMaxAlignment())
1568       Align = AttrAlign;
1569     else
1570       Align = Info.second;
1571     Width = Info.first;
1572     break;
1573   }
1574 
1575   case Type::TypeOfExpr:
1576     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfExprType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType()
1577                          .getTypePtr());
1578 
1579   case Type::TypeOf:
1580     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfType>(T)->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr());
1581 
1582   case Type::Decltype:
1583     return getTypeInfo(cast<DecltypeType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType()
1584                         .getTypePtr());
1585 
1586   case Type::UnaryTransform:
1587     return getTypeInfo(cast<UnaryTransformType>(T)->getUnderlyingType());
1588 
1589   case Type::Elaborated:
1590     return getTypeInfo(cast<ElaboratedType>(T)->getNamedType().getTypePtr());
1591 
1592   case Type::Attributed:
1593     return getTypeInfo(
1594                   cast<AttributedType>(T)->getEquivalentType().getTypePtr());
1595 
1596   case Type::TemplateSpecialization: {
1597     assert(getCanonicalType(T) != T &&
1598            "Cannot request the size of a dependent type");
1599     const TemplateSpecializationType *TST = cast<TemplateSpecializationType>(T);
1600     // A type alias template specialization may refer to a typedef with the
1601     // aligned attribute on it.
1602     if (TST->isTypeAlias())
1603       return getTypeInfo(TST->getAliasedType().getTypePtr());
1604     else
1605       return getTypeInfo(getCanonicalType(T));
1606   }
1607 
1608   case Type::Atomic: {
1609     // Start with the base type information.
1610     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info
1611       = getTypeInfo(cast<AtomicType>(T)->getValueType());
1612     Width = Info.first;
1613     Align = Info.second;
1614 
1615     // If the size of the type doesn't exceed the platform's max
1616     // atomic promotion width, make the size and alignment more
1617     // favorable to atomic operations:
1618     if (Width != 0 && Width <= Target->getMaxAtomicPromoteWidth()) {
1619       // Round the size up to a power of 2.
1620       if (!llvm::isPowerOf2_64(Width))
1621         Width = llvm::NextPowerOf2(Width);
1622 
1623       // Set the alignment equal to the size.
1624       Align = static_cast<unsigned>(Width);
1625     }
1626   }
1627 
1628   }
1629 
1630   assert(llvm::isPowerOf2_32(Align) && "Alignment must be power of 2");
1631   return std::make_pair(Width, Align);
1632 }
1633 
1634 /// toCharUnitsFromBits - Convert a size in bits to a size in characters.
1635 CharUnits ASTContext::toCharUnitsFromBits(int64_t BitSize) const {
1636   return CharUnits::fromQuantity(BitSize / getCharWidth());
1637 }
1638 
1639 /// toBits - Convert a size in characters to a size in characters.
1640 int64_t ASTContext::toBits(CharUnits CharSize) const {
1641   return CharSize.getQuantity() * getCharWidth();
1642 }
1643 
1644 /// getTypeSizeInChars - Return the size of the specified type, in characters.
1645 /// This method does not work on incomplete types.
1646 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(QualType T) const {
1647   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T));
1648 }
1649 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(const Type *T) const {
1650   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T));
1651 }
1652 
1653 /// getTypeAlignInChars - Return the ABI-specified alignment of a type, in
1654 /// characters. This method does not work on incomplete types.
1655 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(QualType T) const {
1656   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T));
1657 }
1658 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(const Type *T) const {
1659   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T));
1660 }
1661 
1662 /// getPreferredTypeAlign - Return the "preferred" alignment of the specified
1663 /// type for the current target in bits.  This can be different than the ABI
1664 /// alignment in cases where it is beneficial for performance to overalign
1665 /// a data type.
1666 unsigned ASTContext::getPreferredTypeAlign(const Type *T) const {
1667   unsigned ABIAlign = getTypeAlign(T);
1668 
1669   // Double and long long should be naturally aligned if possible.
1670   if (const ComplexType* CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>())
1671     T = CT->getElementType().getTypePtr();
1672   if (T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Double) ||
1673       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::LongLong) ||
1674       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::ULongLong))
1675     return std::max(ABIAlign, (unsigned)getTypeSize(T));
1676 
1677   return ABIAlign;
1678 }
1679 
1680 /// DeepCollectObjCIvars -
1681 /// This routine first collects all declared, but not synthesized, ivars in
1682 /// super class and then collects all ivars, including those synthesized for
1683 /// current class. This routine is used for implementation of current class
1684 /// when all ivars, declared and synthesized are known.
1685 ///
1686 void ASTContext::DeepCollectObjCIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI,
1687                                       bool leafClass,
1688                             SmallVectorImpl<const ObjCIvarDecl*> &Ivars) const {
1689   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *SuperClass = OI->getSuperClass())
1690     DeepCollectObjCIvars(SuperClass, false, Ivars);
1691   if (!leafClass) {
1692     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::ivar_iterator I = OI->ivar_begin(),
1693          E = OI->ivar_end(); I != E; ++I)
1694       Ivars.push_back(*I);
1695   } else {
1696     ObjCInterfaceDecl *IDecl = const_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl *>(OI);
1697     for (const ObjCIvarDecl *Iv = IDecl->all_declared_ivar_begin(); Iv;
1698          Iv= Iv->getNextIvar())
1699       Ivars.push_back(Iv);
1700   }
1701 }
1702 
1703 /// CollectInheritedProtocols - Collect all protocols in current class and
1704 /// those inherited by it.
1705 void ASTContext::CollectInheritedProtocols(const Decl *CDecl,
1706                           llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> &Protocols) {
1707   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(CDecl)) {
1708     // We can use protocol_iterator here instead of
1709     // all_referenced_protocol_iterator since we are walking all categories.
1710     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::all_protocol_iterator P = OI->all_referenced_protocol_begin(),
1711          PE = OI->all_referenced_protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1712       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1713       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1714       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1715            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1716         Protocols.insert((*P)->getCanonicalDecl());
1717         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1718       }
1719     }
1720 
1721     // Categories of this Interface.
1722     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::visible_categories_iterator
1723            Cat = OI->visible_categories_begin(),
1724            CatEnd = OI->visible_categories_end();
1725          Cat != CatEnd; ++Cat) {
1726       CollectInheritedProtocols(*Cat, Protocols);
1727     }
1728 
1729     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *SD = OI->getSuperClass())
1730       while (SD) {
1731         CollectInheritedProtocols(SD, Protocols);
1732         SD = SD->getSuperClass();
1733       }
1734   } else if (const ObjCCategoryDecl *OC = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(CDecl)) {
1735     for (ObjCCategoryDecl::protocol_iterator P = OC->protocol_begin(),
1736          PE = OC->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1737       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1738       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1739       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1740            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P)
1741         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1742     }
1743   } else if (const ObjCProtocolDecl *OP = dyn_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl>(CDecl)) {
1744     for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = OP->protocol_begin(),
1745          PE = OP->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1746       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1747       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1748       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1749            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P)
1750         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1751     }
1752   }
1753 }
1754 
1755 unsigned ASTContext::CountNonClassIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI) const {
1756   unsigned count = 0;
1757   // Count ivars declared in class extension.
1758   for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::known_extensions_iterator
1759          Ext = OI->known_extensions_begin(),
1760          ExtEnd = OI->known_extensions_end();
1761        Ext != ExtEnd; ++Ext) {
1762     count += Ext->ivar_size();
1763   }
1764 
1765   // Count ivar defined in this class's implementation.  This
1766   // includes synthesized ivars.
1767   if (ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplDecl = OI->getImplementation())
1768     count += ImplDecl->ivar_size();
1769 
1770   return count;
1771 }
1772 
1773 bool ASTContext::isSentinelNullExpr(const Expr *E) {
1774   if (!E)
1775     return false;
1776 
1777   // nullptr_t is always treated as null.
1778   if (E->getType()->isNullPtrType()) return true;
1779 
1780   if (E->getType()->isAnyPointerType() &&
1781       E->IgnoreParenCasts()->isNullPointerConstant(*this,
1782                                                 Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull))
1783     return true;
1784 
1785   // Unfortunately, __null has type 'int'.
1786   if (isa<GNUNullExpr>(E)) return true;
1787 
1788   return false;
1789 }
1790 
1791 /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl,or NULL if none exists.
1792 ObjCImplementationDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) {
1793   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator
1794     I = ObjCImpls.find(D);
1795   if (I != ObjCImpls.end())
1796     return cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(I->second);
1797   return 0;
1798 }
1799 /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl, or NULL if none exists.
1800 ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *D) {
1801   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator
1802     I = ObjCImpls.find(D);
1803   if (I != ObjCImpls.end())
1804     return cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(I->second);
1805   return 0;
1806 }
1807 
1808 /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl.
1809 void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *IFaceD,
1810                            ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplD) {
1811   assert(IFaceD && ImplD && "Passed null params");
1812   ObjCImpls[IFaceD] = ImplD;
1813 }
1814 /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl.
1815 void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *CatD,
1816                            ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ImplD) {
1817   assert(CatD && ImplD && "Passed null params");
1818   ObjCImpls[CatD] = ImplD;
1819 }
1820 
1821 const ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjContainingInterface(
1822                                               const NamedDecl *ND) const {
1823   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *ID =
1824           dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1825     return ID;
1826   if (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CD =
1827           dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1828     return CD->getClassInterface();
1829   if (const ObjCImplDecl *IMD =
1830           dyn_cast<ObjCImplDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1831     return IMD->getClassInterface();
1832 
1833   return 0;
1834 }
1835 
1836 /// \brief Get the copy initialization expression of VarDecl,or NULL if
1837 /// none exists.
1838 Expr *ASTContext::getBlockVarCopyInits(const VarDecl*VD) {
1839   assert(VD && "Passed null params");
1840   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&
1841          "getBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var");
1842   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl*, Expr*>::iterator
1843     I = BlockVarCopyInits.find(VD);
1844   return (I != BlockVarCopyInits.end()) ? cast<Expr>(I->second) : 0;
1845 }
1846 
1847 /// \brief Set the copy inialization expression of a block var decl.
1848 void ASTContext::setBlockVarCopyInits(VarDecl*VD, Expr* Init) {
1849   assert(VD && Init && "Passed null params");
1850   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&
1851          "setBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var");
1852   BlockVarCopyInits[VD] = Init;
1853 }
1854 
1855 TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::CreateTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,
1856                                                  unsigned DataSize) const {
1857   if (!DataSize)
1858     DataSize = TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T);
1859   else
1860     assert(DataSize == TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T) &&
1861            "incorrect data size provided to CreateTypeSourceInfo!");
1862 
1863   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo =
1864     (TypeSourceInfo*)BumpAlloc.Allocate(sizeof(TypeSourceInfo) + DataSize, 8);
1865   new (TInfo) TypeSourceInfo(T);
1866   return TInfo;
1867 }
1868 
1869 TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,
1870                                                      SourceLocation L) const {
1871   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(T);
1872   DI->getTypeLoc().initialize(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), L);
1873   return DI;
1874 }
1875 
1876 const ASTRecordLayout &
1877 ASTContext::getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) const {
1878   return getObjCLayout(D, 0);
1879 }
1880 
1881 const ASTRecordLayout &
1882 ASTContext::getASTObjCImplementationLayout(
1883                                         const ObjCImplementationDecl *D) const {
1884   return getObjCLayout(D->getClassInterface(), D);
1885 }
1886 
1887 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1888 //                   Type creation/memoization methods
1889 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1890 
1891 QualType
1892 ASTContext::getExtQualType(const Type *baseType, Qualifiers quals) const {
1893   unsigned fastQuals = quals.getFastQualifiers();
1894   quals.removeFastQualifiers();
1895 
1896   // Check if we've already instantiated this type.
1897   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1898   ExtQuals::Profile(ID, baseType, quals);
1899   void *insertPos = 0;
1900   if (ExtQuals *eq = ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos)) {
1901     assert(eq->getQualifiers() == quals);
1902     return QualType(eq, fastQuals);
1903   }
1904 
1905   // If the base type is not canonical, make the appropriate canonical type.
1906   QualType canon;
1907   if (!baseType->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
1908     SplitQualType canonSplit = baseType->getCanonicalTypeInternal().split();
1909     canonSplit.Quals.addConsistentQualifiers(quals);
1910     canon = getExtQualType(canonSplit.Ty, canonSplit.Quals);
1911 
1912     // Re-find the insert position.
1913     (void) ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
1914   }
1915 
1916   ExtQuals *eq = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ExtQuals(baseType, canon, quals);
1917   ExtQualNodes.InsertNode(eq, insertPos);
1918   return QualType(eq, fastQuals);
1919 }
1920 
1921 QualType
1922 ASTContext::getAddrSpaceQualType(QualType T, unsigned AddressSpace) const {
1923   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T);
1924   if (CanT.getAddressSpace() == AddressSpace)
1925     return T;
1926 
1927   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together
1928   // into one ExtQuals node.
1929   QualifierCollector Quals;
1930   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T);
1931 
1932   // If this type already has an address space specified, it cannot get
1933   // another one.
1934   assert(!Quals.hasAddressSpace() &&
1935          "Type cannot be in multiple addr spaces!");
1936   Quals.addAddressSpace(AddressSpace);
1937 
1938   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals);
1939 }
1940 
1941 QualType ASTContext::getObjCGCQualType(QualType T,
1942                                        Qualifiers::GC GCAttr) const {
1943   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T);
1944   if (CanT.getObjCGCAttr() == GCAttr)
1945     return T;
1946 
1947   if (const PointerType *ptr = T->getAs<PointerType>()) {
1948     QualType Pointee = ptr->getPointeeType();
1949     if (Pointee->isAnyPointerType()) {
1950       QualType ResultType = getObjCGCQualType(Pointee, GCAttr);
1951       return getPointerType(ResultType);
1952     }
1953   }
1954 
1955   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together
1956   // into one ExtQuals node.
1957   QualifierCollector Quals;
1958   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T);
1959 
1960   // If this type already has an ObjCGC specified, it cannot get
1961   // another one.
1962   assert(!Quals.hasObjCGCAttr() &&
1963          "Type cannot have multiple ObjCGCs!");
1964   Quals.addObjCGCAttr(GCAttr);
1965 
1966   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals);
1967 }
1968 
1969 const FunctionType *ASTContext::adjustFunctionType(const FunctionType *T,
1970                                                    FunctionType::ExtInfo Info) {
1971   if (T->getExtInfo() == Info)
1972     return T;
1973 
1974   QualType Result;
1975   if (const FunctionNoProtoType *FNPT = dyn_cast<FunctionNoProtoType>(T)) {
1976     Result = getFunctionNoProtoType(FNPT->getResultType(), Info);
1977   } else {
1978     const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(T);
1979     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo();
1980     EPI.ExtInfo = Info;
1981     Result = getFunctionType(FPT->getResultType(),
1982                              ArrayRef<QualType>(FPT->arg_type_begin(),
1983                                                 FPT->getNumArgs()),
1984                              EPI);
1985   }
1986 
1987   return cast<FunctionType>(Result.getTypePtr());
1988 }
1989 
1990 /// getComplexType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a complex
1991 /// number with the specified element type.
1992 QualType ASTContext::getComplexType(QualType T) const {
1993   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1994   // structure.
1995   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1996   ComplexType::Profile(ID, T);
1997 
1998   void *InsertPos = 0;
1999   if (ComplexType *CT = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2000     return QualType(CT, 0);
2001 
2002   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2003   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2004   QualType Canonical;
2005   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
2006     Canonical = getComplexType(getCanonicalType(T));
2007 
2008     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2009     ComplexType *NewIP = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2010     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2011   }
2012   ComplexType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ComplexType(T, Canonical);
2013   Types.push_back(New);
2014   ComplexTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2015   return QualType(New, 0);
2016 }
2017 
2018 /// getPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a pointer to
2019 /// the specified type.
2020 QualType ASTContext::getPointerType(QualType T) const {
2021   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
2022   // structure.
2023   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2024   PointerType::Profile(ID, T);
2025 
2026   void *InsertPos = 0;
2027   if (PointerType *PT = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2028     return QualType(PT, 0);
2029 
2030   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2031   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2032   QualType Canonical;
2033   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
2034     Canonical = getPointerType(getCanonicalType(T));
2035 
2036     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2037     PointerType *NewIP = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2038     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2039   }
2040   PointerType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) PointerType(T, Canonical);
2041   Types.push_back(New);
2042   PointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2043   return QualType(New, 0);
2044 }
2045 
2046 /// getBlockPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for
2047 /// a pointer to the specified block.
2048 QualType ASTContext::getBlockPointerType(QualType T) const {
2049   assert(T->isFunctionType() && "block of function types only");
2050   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one block of a particular
2051   // structure.
2052   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2053   BlockPointerType::Profile(ID, T);
2054 
2055   void *InsertPos = 0;
2056   if (BlockPointerType *PT =
2057         BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2058     return QualType(PT, 0);
2059 
2060   // If the block pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical
2061   // type either so fill in the canonical type field.
2062   QualType Canonical;
2063   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
2064     Canonical = getBlockPointerType(getCanonicalType(T));
2065 
2066     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2067     BlockPointerType *NewIP =
2068       BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2069     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2070   }
2071   BlockPointerType *New
2072     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BlockPointerType(T, Canonical);
2073   Types.push_back(New);
2074   BlockPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2075   return QualType(New, 0);
2076 }
2077 
2078 /// getLValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an
2079 /// lvalue reference to the specified type.
2080 QualType
2081 ASTContext::getLValueReferenceType(QualType T, bool SpelledAsLValue) const {
2082   assert(getCanonicalType(T) != OverloadTy &&
2083          "Unresolved overloaded function type");
2084 
2085   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
2086   // structure.
2087   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2088   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, SpelledAsLValue);
2089 
2090   void *InsertPos = 0;
2091   if (LValueReferenceType *RT =
2092         LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2093     return QualType(RT, 0);
2094 
2095   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>();
2096 
2097   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
2098   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
2099   QualType Canonical;
2100   if (!SpelledAsLValue || InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) {
2101     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T);
2102     Canonical = getLValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType));
2103 
2104     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2105     LValueReferenceType *NewIP =
2106       LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2107     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2108   }
2109 
2110   LValueReferenceType *New
2111     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) LValueReferenceType(T, Canonical,
2112                                                      SpelledAsLValue);
2113   Types.push_back(New);
2114   LValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2115 
2116   return QualType(New, 0);
2117 }
2118 
2119 /// getRValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an
2120 /// rvalue reference to the specified type.
2121 QualType ASTContext::getRValueReferenceType(QualType T) const {
2122   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
2123   // structure.
2124   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2125   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, false);
2126 
2127   void *InsertPos = 0;
2128   if (RValueReferenceType *RT =
2129         RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2130     return QualType(RT, 0);
2131 
2132   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>();
2133 
2134   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
2135   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
2136   QualType Canonical;
2137   if (InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) {
2138     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T);
2139     Canonical = getRValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType));
2140 
2141     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2142     RValueReferenceType *NewIP =
2143       RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2144     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2145   }
2146 
2147   RValueReferenceType *New
2148     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RValueReferenceType(T, Canonical);
2149   Types.push_back(New);
2150   RValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2151   return QualType(New, 0);
2152 }
2153 
2154 /// getMemberPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a
2155 /// member pointer to the specified type, in the specified class.
2156 QualType ASTContext::getMemberPointerType(QualType T, const Type *Cls) const {
2157   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
2158   // structure.
2159   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2160   MemberPointerType::Profile(ID, T, Cls);
2161 
2162   void *InsertPos = 0;
2163   if (MemberPointerType *PT =
2164       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2165     return QualType(PT, 0);
2166 
2167   // If the pointee or class type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical
2168   // type either, so fill in the canonical type field.
2169   QualType Canonical;
2170   if (!T.isCanonical() || !Cls->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
2171     Canonical = getMemberPointerType(getCanonicalType(T),getCanonicalType(Cls));
2172 
2173     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2174     MemberPointerType *NewIP =
2175       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2176     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2177   }
2178   MemberPointerType *New
2179     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) MemberPointerType(T, Cls, Canonical);
2180   Types.push_back(New);
2181   MemberPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2182   return QualType(New, 0);
2183 }
2184 
2185 /// getConstantArrayType - Return the unique reference to the type for an
2186 /// array of the specified element type.
2187 QualType ASTContext::getConstantArrayType(QualType EltTy,
2188                                           const llvm::APInt &ArySizeIn,
2189                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2190                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals) const {
2191   assert((EltTy->isDependentType() ||
2192           EltTy->isIncompleteType() || EltTy->isConstantSizeType()) &&
2193          "Constant array of VLAs is illegal!");
2194 
2195   // Convert the array size into a canonical width matching the pointer size for
2196   // the target.
2197   llvm::APInt ArySize(ArySizeIn);
2198   ArySize =
2199     ArySize.zextOrTrunc(Target->getPointerWidth(getTargetAddressSpace(EltTy)));
2200 
2201   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2202   ConstantArrayType::Profile(ID, EltTy, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
2203 
2204   void *InsertPos = 0;
2205   if (ConstantArrayType *ATP =
2206       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2207     return QualType(ATP, 0);
2208 
2209   // If the element type isn't canonical or has qualifiers, this won't
2210   // be a canonical type either, so fill in the canonical type field.
2211   QualType Canon;
2212   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2213     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split();
2214     Canon = getConstantArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), ArySize,
2215                                  ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
2216     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2217 
2218     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2219     ConstantArrayType *NewIP =
2220       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2221     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2222   }
2223 
2224   ConstantArrayType *New = new(*this,TypeAlignment)
2225     ConstantArrayType(EltTy, Canon, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
2226   ConstantArrayTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2227   Types.push_back(New);
2228   return QualType(New, 0);
2229 }
2230 
2231 /// getVariableArrayDecayedType - Turns the given type, which may be
2232 /// variably-modified, into the corresponding type with all the known
2233 /// sizes replaced with [*].
2234 QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayDecayedType(QualType type) const {
2235   // Vastly most common case.
2236   if (!type->isVariablyModifiedType()) return type;
2237 
2238   QualType result;
2239 
2240   SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType();
2241   const Type *ty = split.Ty;
2242   switch (ty->getTypeClass()) {
2243 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
2244 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
2245 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
2246 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
2247     llvm_unreachable("didn't desugar past all non-canonical types?");
2248 
2249   // These types should never be variably-modified.
2250   case Type::Builtin:
2251   case Type::Complex:
2252   case Type::Vector:
2253   case Type::ExtVector:
2254   case Type::DependentSizedExtVector:
2255   case Type::ObjCObject:
2256   case Type::ObjCInterface:
2257   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer:
2258   case Type::Record:
2259   case Type::Enum:
2260   case Type::UnresolvedUsing:
2261   case Type::TypeOfExpr:
2262   case Type::TypeOf:
2263   case Type::Decltype:
2264   case Type::UnaryTransform:
2265   case Type::DependentName:
2266   case Type::InjectedClassName:
2267   case Type::TemplateSpecialization:
2268   case Type::DependentTemplateSpecialization:
2269   case Type::TemplateTypeParm:
2270   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParmPack:
2271   case Type::Auto:
2272   case Type::PackExpansion:
2273     llvm_unreachable("type should never be variably-modified");
2274 
2275   // These types can be variably-modified but should never need to
2276   // further decay.
2277   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
2278   case Type::FunctionProto:
2279   case Type::BlockPointer:
2280   case Type::MemberPointer:
2281     return type;
2282 
2283   // These types can be variably-modified.  All these modifications
2284   // preserve structure except as noted by comments.
2285   // TODO: if we ever care about optimizing VLAs, there are no-op
2286   // optimizations available here.
2287   case Type::Pointer:
2288     result = getPointerType(getVariableArrayDecayedType(
2289                               cast<PointerType>(ty)->getPointeeType()));
2290     break;
2291 
2292   case Type::LValueReference: {
2293     const LValueReferenceType *lv = cast<LValueReferenceType>(ty);
2294     result = getLValueReferenceType(
2295                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()),
2296                                     lv->isSpelledAsLValue());
2297     break;
2298   }
2299 
2300   case Type::RValueReference: {
2301     const RValueReferenceType *lv = cast<RValueReferenceType>(ty);
2302     result = getRValueReferenceType(
2303                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()));
2304     break;
2305   }
2306 
2307   case Type::Atomic: {
2308     const AtomicType *at = cast<AtomicType>(ty);
2309     result = getAtomicType(getVariableArrayDecayedType(at->getValueType()));
2310     break;
2311   }
2312 
2313   case Type::ConstantArray: {
2314     const ConstantArrayType *cat = cast<ConstantArrayType>(ty);
2315     result = getConstantArrayType(
2316                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(cat->getElementType()),
2317                                   cat->getSize(),
2318                                   cat->getSizeModifier(),
2319                                   cat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers());
2320     break;
2321   }
2322 
2323   case Type::DependentSizedArray: {
2324     const DependentSizedArrayType *dat = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ty);
2325     result = getDependentSizedArrayType(
2326                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(dat->getElementType()),
2327                                         dat->getSizeExpr(),
2328                                         dat->getSizeModifier(),
2329                                         dat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2330                                         dat->getBracketsRange());
2331     break;
2332   }
2333 
2334   // Turn incomplete types into [*] types.
2335   case Type::IncompleteArray: {
2336     const IncompleteArrayType *iat = cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ty);
2337     result = getVariableArrayType(
2338                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(iat->getElementType()),
2339                                   /*size*/ 0,
2340                                   ArrayType::Normal,
2341                                   iat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2342                                   SourceRange());
2343     break;
2344   }
2345 
2346   // Turn VLA types into [*] types.
2347   case Type::VariableArray: {
2348     const VariableArrayType *vat = cast<VariableArrayType>(ty);
2349     result = getVariableArrayType(
2350                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(vat->getElementType()),
2351                                   /*size*/ 0,
2352                                   ArrayType::Star,
2353                                   vat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2354                                   vat->getBracketsRange());
2355     break;
2356   }
2357   }
2358 
2359   // Apply the top-level qualifiers from the original.
2360   return getQualifiedType(result, split.Quals);
2361 }
2362 
2363 /// getVariableArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to the type for a
2364 /// variable array of the specified element type.
2365 QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayType(QualType EltTy,
2366                                           Expr *NumElts,
2367                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2368                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals,
2369                                           SourceRange Brackets) const {
2370   // Since we don't unique expressions, it isn't possible to unique VLA's
2371   // that have an expression provided for their size.
2372   QualType Canon;
2373 
2374   // Be sure to pull qualifiers off the element type.
2375   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2376     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split();
2377     Canon = getVariableArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), NumElts, ASM,
2378                                  IndexTypeQuals, Brackets);
2379     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2380   }
2381 
2382   VariableArrayType *New = new(*this, TypeAlignment)
2383     VariableArrayType(EltTy, Canon, NumElts, ASM, IndexTypeQuals, Brackets);
2384 
2385   VariableArrayTypes.push_back(New);
2386   Types.push_back(New);
2387   return QualType(New, 0);
2388 }
2389 
2390 /// getDependentSizedArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to
2391 /// the type for a dependently-sized array of the specified element
2392 /// type.
2393 QualType ASTContext::getDependentSizedArrayType(QualType elementType,
2394                                                 Expr *numElements,
2395                                                 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2396                                                 unsigned elementTypeQuals,
2397                                                 SourceRange brackets) const {
2398   assert((!numElements || numElements->isTypeDependent() ||
2399           numElements->isValueDependent()) &&
2400          "Size must be type- or value-dependent!");
2401 
2402   // Dependently-sized array types that do not have a specified number
2403   // of elements will have their sizes deduced from a dependent
2404   // initializer.  We do no canonicalization here at all, which is okay
2405   // because they can't be used in most locations.
2406   if (!numElements) {
2407     DependentSizedArrayType *newType
2408       = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2409           DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, QualType(),
2410                                   numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals,
2411                                   brackets);
2412     Types.push_back(newType);
2413     return QualType(newType, 0);
2414   }
2415 
2416   // Otherwise, we actually build a new type every time, but we
2417   // also build a canonical type.
2418 
2419   SplitQualType canonElementType = getCanonicalType(elementType).split();
2420 
2421   void *insertPos = 0;
2422   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2423   DependentSizedArrayType::Profile(ID, *this,
2424                                    QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0),
2425                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals, numElements);
2426 
2427   // Look for an existing type with these properties.
2428   DependentSizedArrayType *canonTy =
2429     DependentSizedArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
2430 
2431   // If we don't have one, build one.
2432   if (!canonTy) {
2433     canonTy = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2434       DependentSizedArrayType(*this, QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0),
2435                               QualType(), numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals,
2436                               brackets);
2437     DependentSizedArrayTypes.InsertNode(canonTy, insertPos);
2438     Types.push_back(canonTy);
2439   }
2440 
2441   // Apply qualifiers from the element type to the array.
2442   QualType canon = getQualifiedType(QualType(canonTy,0),
2443                                     canonElementType.Quals);
2444 
2445   // If we didn't need extra canonicalization for the element type,
2446   // then just use that as our result.
2447   if (QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0) == elementType)
2448     return canon;
2449 
2450   // Otherwise, we need to build a type which follows the spelling
2451   // of the element type.
2452   DependentSizedArrayType *sugaredType
2453     = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2454         DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, canon, numElements,
2455                                 ASM, elementTypeQuals, brackets);
2456   Types.push_back(sugaredType);
2457   return QualType(sugaredType, 0);
2458 }
2459 
2460 QualType ASTContext::getIncompleteArrayType(QualType elementType,
2461                                             ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2462                                             unsigned elementTypeQuals) const {
2463   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2464   IncompleteArrayType::Profile(ID, elementType, ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2465 
2466   void *insertPos = 0;
2467   if (IncompleteArrayType *iat =
2468        IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos))
2469     return QualType(iat, 0);
2470 
2471   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
2472   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.  We also have to pull
2473   // qualifiers off the element type.
2474   QualType canon;
2475 
2476   if (!elementType.isCanonical() || elementType.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2477     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(elementType).split();
2478     canon = getIncompleteArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0),
2479                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2480     canon = getQualifiedType(canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2481 
2482     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2483     IncompleteArrayType *existing =
2484       IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
2485     assert(!existing && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void) existing;
2486   }
2487 
2488   IncompleteArrayType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2489     IncompleteArrayType(elementType, canon, ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2490 
2491   IncompleteArrayTypes.InsertNode(newType, insertPos);
2492   Types.push_back(newType);
2493   return QualType(newType, 0);
2494 }
2495 
2496 /// getVectorType - Return the unique reference to a vector type of
2497 /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type.
2498 QualType ASTContext::getVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts,
2499                                    VectorType::VectorKind VecKind) const {
2500   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType());
2501 
2502   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type.
2503   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2504   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::Vector, VecKind);
2505 
2506   void *InsertPos = 0;
2507   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2508     return QualType(VTP, 0);
2509 
2510   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2511   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2512   QualType Canonical;
2513   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) {
2514     Canonical = getVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts, VecKind);
2515 
2516     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2517     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2518     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2519   }
2520   VectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2521     VectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical, VecKind);
2522   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2523   Types.push_back(New);
2524   return QualType(New, 0);
2525 }
2526 
2527 /// getExtVectorType - Return the unique reference to an extended vector type of
2528 /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type.
2529 QualType
2530 ASTContext::getExtVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts) const {
2531   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType() || vecType->isDependentType());
2532 
2533   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type.
2534   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2535   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::ExtVector,
2536                       VectorType::GenericVector);
2537   void *InsertPos = 0;
2538   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2539     return QualType(VTP, 0);
2540 
2541   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2542   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2543   QualType Canonical;
2544   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) {
2545     Canonical = getExtVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts);
2546 
2547     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2548     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2549     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2550   }
2551   ExtVectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2552     ExtVectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical);
2553   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2554   Types.push_back(New);
2555   return QualType(New, 0);
2556 }
2557 
2558 QualType
2559 ASTContext::getDependentSizedExtVectorType(QualType vecType,
2560                                            Expr *SizeExpr,
2561                                            SourceLocation AttrLoc) const {
2562   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2563   DependentSizedExtVectorType::Profile(ID, *this, getCanonicalType(vecType),
2564                                        SizeExpr);
2565 
2566   void *InsertPos = 0;
2567   DependentSizedExtVectorType *Canon
2568     = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2569   DependentSizedExtVectorType *New;
2570   if (Canon) {
2571     // We already have a canonical version of this array type; use it as
2572     // the canonical type for a newly-built type.
2573     New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2574       DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(Canon, 0),
2575                                   SizeExpr, AttrLoc);
2576   } else {
2577     QualType CanonVecTy = getCanonicalType(vecType);
2578     if (CanonVecTy == vecType) {
2579       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2580         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(), SizeExpr,
2581                                     AttrLoc);
2582 
2583       DependentSizedExtVectorType *CanonCheck
2584         = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2585       assert(!CanonCheck && "Dependent-sized ext_vector canonical type broken");
2586       (void)CanonCheck;
2587       DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2588     } else {
2589       QualType Canon = getDependentSizedExtVectorType(CanonVecTy, SizeExpr,
2590                                                       SourceLocation());
2591       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2592         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, Canon, SizeExpr, AttrLoc);
2593     }
2594   }
2595 
2596   Types.push_back(New);
2597   return QualType(New, 0);
2598 }
2599 
2600 /// getFunctionNoProtoType - Return a K&R style C function type like 'int()'.
2601 ///
2602 QualType
2603 ASTContext::getFunctionNoProtoType(QualType ResultTy,
2604                                    const FunctionType::ExtInfo &Info) const {
2605   const CallingConv DefaultCC = Info.getCC();
2606   const CallingConv CallConv = (LangOpts.MRTD && DefaultCC == CC_Default) ?
2607                                CC_X86StdCall : DefaultCC;
2608   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular
2609   // structure.
2610   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2611   FunctionNoProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, Info);
2612 
2613   void *InsertPos = 0;
2614   if (FunctionNoProtoType *FT =
2615         FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2616     return QualType(FT, 0);
2617 
2618   QualType Canonical;
2619   if (!ResultTy.isCanonical() ||
2620       getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) {
2621     Canonical =
2622       getFunctionNoProtoType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy),
2623                      Info.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv)));
2624 
2625     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2626     FunctionNoProtoType *NewIP =
2627       FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2628     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2629   }
2630 
2631   FunctionProtoType::ExtInfo newInfo = Info.withCallingConv(CallConv);
2632   FunctionNoProtoType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2633     FunctionNoProtoType(ResultTy, Canonical, newInfo);
2634   Types.push_back(New);
2635   FunctionNoProtoTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2636   return QualType(New, 0);
2637 }
2638 
2639 /// \brief Determine whether \p T is canonical as the result type of a function.
2640 static bool isCanonicalResultType(QualType T) {
2641   return T.isCanonical() &&
2642          (T.getObjCLifetime() == Qualifiers::OCL_None ||
2643           T.getObjCLifetime() == Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone);
2644 }
2645 
2646 /// getFunctionType - Return a normal function type with a typed argument
2647 /// list.  isVariadic indicates whether the argument list includes '...'.
2648 QualType
2649 ASTContext::getFunctionType(QualType ResultTy, ArrayRef<QualType> ArgArray,
2650                             const FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo &EPI) const {
2651   size_t NumArgs = ArgArray.size();
2652 
2653   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular
2654   // structure.
2655   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2656   FunctionProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, ArgArray.begin(), NumArgs, EPI,
2657                              *this);
2658 
2659   void *InsertPos = 0;
2660   if (FunctionProtoType *FTP =
2661         FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2662     return QualType(FTP, 0);
2663 
2664   // Determine whether the type being created is already canonical or not.
2665   bool isCanonical =
2666     EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_None && isCanonicalResultType(ResultTy) &&
2667     !EPI.HasTrailingReturn;
2668   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs && isCanonical; ++i)
2669     if (!ArgArray[i].isCanonicalAsParam())
2670       isCanonical = false;
2671 
2672   const CallingConv DefaultCC = EPI.ExtInfo.getCC();
2673   const CallingConv CallConv = (LangOpts.MRTD && DefaultCC == CC_Default) ?
2674                                CC_X86StdCall : DefaultCC;
2675 
2676   // If this type isn't canonical, get the canonical version of it.
2677   // The exception spec is not part of the canonical type.
2678   QualType Canonical;
2679   if (!isCanonical || getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) {
2680     SmallVector<QualType, 16> CanonicalArgs;
2681     CanonicalArgs.reserve(NumArgs);
2682     for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i)
2683       CanonicalArgs.push_back(getCanonicalParamType(ArgArray[i]));
2684 
2685     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo CanonicalEPI = EPI;
2686     CanonicalEPI.HasTrailingReturn = false;
2687     CanonicalEPI.ExceptionSpecType = EST_None;
2688     CanonicalEPI.NumExceptions = 0;
2689     CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo
2690       = CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv));
2691 
2692     // Result types do not have ARC lifetime qualifiers.
2693     QualType CanResultTy = getCanonicalType(ResultTy);
2694     if (ResultTy.getQualifiers().hasObjCLifetime()) {
2695       Qualifiers Qs = CanResultTy.getQualifiers();
2696       Qs.removeObjCLifetime();
2697       CanResultTy = getQualifiedType(CanResultTy.getUnqualifiedType(), Qs);
2698     }
2699 
2700     Canonical = getFunctionType(CanResultTy, CanonicalArgs, CanonicalEPI);
2701 
2702     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2703     FunctionProtoType *NewIP =
2704       FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2705     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2706   }
2707 
2708   // FunctionProtoType objects are allocated with extra bytes after
2709   // them for three variable size arrays at the end:
2710   //  - parameter types
2711   //  - exception types
2712   //  - consumed-arguments flags
2713   // Instead of the exception types, there could be a noexcept
2714   // expression, or information used to resolve the exception
2715   // specification.
2716   size_t Size = sizeof(FunctionProtoType) +
2717                 NumArgs * sizeof(QualType);
2718   if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Dynamic) {
2719     Size += EPI.NumExceptions * sizeof(QualType);
2720   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_ComputedNoexcept) {
2721     Size += sizeof(Expr*);
2722   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Uninstantiated) {
2723     Size += 2 * sizeof(FunctionDecl*);
2724   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Unevaluated) {
2725     Size += sizeof(FunctionDecl*);
2726   }
2727   if (EPI.ConsumedArguments)
2728     Size += NumArgs * sizeof(bool);
2729 
2730   FunctionProtoType *FTP = (FunctionProtoType*) Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment);
2731   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo newEPI = EPI;
2732   newEPI.ExtInfo = EPI.ExtInfo.withCallingConv(CallConv);
2733   new (FTP) FunctionProtoType(ResultTy, ArgArray, Canonical, newEPI);
2734   Types.push_back(FTP);
2735   FunctionProtoTypes.InsertNode(FTP, InsertPos);
2736   return QualType(FTP, 0);
2737 }
2738 
2739 #ifndef NDEBUG
2740 static bool NeedsInjectedClassNameType(const RecordDecl *D) {
2741   if (!isa<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) return false;
2742   const CXXRecordDecl *RD = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D);
2743   if (isa<ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl>(RD))
2744     return true;
2745   if (RD->getDescribedClassTemplate() &&
2746       !isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RD))
2747     return true;
2748   return false;
2749 }
2750 #endif
2751 
2752 /// getInjectedClassNameType - Return the unique reference to the
2753 /// injected class name type for the specified templated declaration.
2754 QualType ASTContext::getInjectedClassNameType(CXXRecordDecl *Decl,
2755                                               QualType TST) const {
2756   assert(NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Decl));
2757   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) {
2758     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl));
2759   } else if (CXXRecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl()) {
2760     assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous declaration has no type");
2761     Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl;
2762     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl));
2763   } else {
2764     Type *newType =
2765       new (*this, TypeAlignment) InjectedClassNameType(Decl, TST);
2766     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2767     Types.push_back(newType);
2768   }
2769   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2770 }
2771 
2772 /// getTypeDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
2773 /// specified type declaration.
2774 QualType ASTContext::getTypeDeclTypeSlow(const TypeDecl *Decl) const {
2775   assert(Decl && "Passed null for Decl param");
2776   assert(!Decl->TypeForDecl && "TypeForDecl present in slow case");
2777 
2778   if (const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = dyn_cast<TypedefNameDecl>(Decl))
2779     return getTypedefType(Typedef);
2780 
2781   assert(!isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(Decl) &&
2782          "Template type parameter types are always available.");
2783 
2784   if (const RecordDecl *Record = dyn_cast<RecordDecl>(Decl)) {
2785     assert(!Record->getPreviousDecl() &&
2786            "struct/union has previous declaration");
2787     assert(!NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Record));
2788     return getRecordType(Record);
2789   } else if (const EnumDecl *Enum = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(Decl)) {
2790     assert(!Enum->getPreviousDecl() &&
2791            "enum has previous declaration");
2792     return getEnumType(Enum);
2793   } else if (const UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *Using =
2794                dyn_cast<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Decl)) {
2795     Type *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnresolvedUsingType(Using);
2796     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2797     Types.push_back(newType);
2798   } else
2799     llvm_unreachable("TypeDecl without a type?");
2800 
2801   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2802 }
2803 
2804 /// getTypedefType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
2805 /// specified typedef name decl.
2806 QualType
2807 ASTContext::getTypedefType(const TypedefNameDecl *Decl,
2808                            QualType Canonical) const {
2809   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2810 
2811   if (Canonical.isNull())
2812     Canonical = getCanonicalType(Decl->getUnderlyingType());
2813   TypedefType *newType = new(*this, TypeAlignment)
2814     TypedefType(Type::Typedef, Decl, Canonical);
2815   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2816   Types.push_back(newType);
2817   return QualType(newType, 0);
2818 }
2819 
2820 QualType ASTContext::getRecordType(const RecordDecl *Decl) const {
2821   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2822 
2823   if (const RecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl())
2824     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl)
2825       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2826 
2827   RecordType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RecordType(Decl);
2828   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2829   Types.push_back(newType);
2830   return QualType(newType, 0);
2831 }
2832 
2833 QualType ASTContext::getEnumType(const EnumDecl *Decl) const {
2834   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2835 
2836   if (const EnumDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl())
2837     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl)
2838       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2839 
2840   EnumType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) EnumType(Decl);
2841   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2842   Types.push_back(newType);
2843   return QualType(newType, 0);
2844 }
2845 
2846 QualType ASTContext::getAttributedType(AttributedType::Kind attrKind,
2847                                        QualType modifiedType,
2848                                        QualType equivalentType) {
2849   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID id;
2850   AttributedType::Profile(id, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType);
2851 
2852   void *insertPos = 0;
2853   AttributedType *type = AttributedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(id, insertPos);
2854   if (type) return QualType(type, 0);
2855 
2856   QualType canon = getCanonicalType(equivalentType);
2857   type = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2858            AttributedType(canon, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType);
2859 
2860   Types.push_back(type);
2861   AttributedTypes.InsertNode(type, insertPos);
2862 
2863   return QualType(type, 0);
2864 }
2865 
2866 
2867 /// \brief Retrieve a substitution-result type.
2868 QualType
2869 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmType(const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm,
2870                                          QualType Replacement) const {
2871   assert(Replacement.isCanonical()
2872          && "replacement types must always be canonical");
2873 
2874   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2875   SubstTemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Parm, Replacement);
2876   void *InsertPos = 0;
2877   SubstTemplateTypeParmType *SubstParm
2878     = SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2879 
2880   if (!SubstParm) {
2881     SubstParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2882       SubstTemplateTypeParmType(Parm, Replacement);
2883     Types.push_back(SubstParm);
2884     SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos);
2885   }
2886 
2887   return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2888 }
2889 
2890 /// \brief Retrieve a
2891 QualType ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(
2892                                           const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm,
2893                                               const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) {
2894 #ifndef NDEBUG
2895   for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator P = ArgPack.pack_begin(),
2896                                     PEnd = ArgPack.pack_end();
2897        P != PEnd; ++P) {
2898     assert(P->getKind() == TemplateArgument::Type &&"Pack contains a non-type");
2899     assert(P->getAsType().isCanonical() && "Pack contains non-canonical type");
2900   }
2901 #endif
2902 
2903   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2904   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType::Profile(ID, Parm, ArgPack);
2905   void *InsertPos = 0;
2906   if (SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm
2907         = SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2908     return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2909 
2910   QualType Canon;
2911   if (!Parm->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
2912     Canon = getCanonicalType(QualType(Parm, 0));
2913     Canon = getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(cast<TemplateTypeParmType>(Canon),
2914                                              ArgPack);
2915     SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2916   }
2917 
2918   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm
2919     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(Parm, Canon,
2920                                                                ArgPack);
2921   Types.push_back(SubstParm);
2922   SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos);
2923   return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2924 }
2925 
2926 /// \brief Retrieve the template type parameter type for a template
2927 /// parameter or parameter pack with the given depth, index, and (optionally)
2928 /// name.
2929 QualType ASTContext::getTemplateTypeParmType(unsigned Depth, unsigned Index,
2930                                              bool ParameterPack,
2931                                              TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTPDecl) const {
2932   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2933   TemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Depth, Index, ParameterPack, TTPDecl);
2934   void *InsertPos = 0;
2935   TemplateTypeParmType *TypeParm
2936     = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2937 
2938   if (TypeParm)
2939     return QualType(TypeParm, 0);
2940 
2941   if (TTPDecl) {
2942     QualType Canon = getTemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack);
2943     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TemplateTypeParmType(TTPDecl, Canon);
2944 
2945     TemplateTypeParmType *TypeCheck
2946       = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2947     assert(!TypeCheck && "Template type parameter canonical type broken");
2948     (void)TypeCheck;
2949   } else
2950     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2951       TemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack);
2952 
2953   Types.push_back(TypeParm);
2954   TemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(TypeParm, InsertPos);
2955 
2956   return QualType(TypeParm, 0);
2957 }
2958 
2959 TypeSourceInfo *
2960 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationTypeInfo(TemplateName Name,
2961                                               SourceLocation NameLoc,
2962                                         const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args,
2963                                               QualType Underlying) const {
2964   assert(!Name.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2965          "No dependent template names here!");
2966   QualType TST = getTemplateSpecializationType(Name, Args, Underlying);
2967 
2968   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(TST);
2969   TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc TL =
2970       DI->getTypeLoc().castAs<TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc>();
2971   TL.setTemplateKeywordLoc(SourceLocation());
2972   TL.setTemplateNameLoc(NameLoc);
2973   TL.setLAngleLoc(Args.getLAngleLoc());
2974   TL.setRAngleLoc(Args.getRAngleLoc());
2975   for (unsigned i = 0, e = TL.getNumArgs(); i != e; ++i)
2976     TL.setArgLocInfo(i, Args[i].getLocInfo());
2977   return DI;
2978 }
2979 
2980 QualType
2981 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2982                                           const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args,
2983                                           QualType Underlying) const {
2984   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2985          "No dependent template names here!");
2986 
2987   unsigned NumArgs = Args.size();
2988 
2989   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> ArgVec;
2990   ArgVec.reserve(NumArgs);
2991   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i)
2992     ArgVec.push_back(Args[i].getArgument());
2993 
2994   return getTemplateSpecializationType(Template, ArgVec.data(), NumArgs,
2995                                        Underlying);
2996 }
2997 
2998 #ifndef NDEBUG
2999 static bool hasAnyPackExpansions(const TemplateArgument *Args,
3000                                  unsigned NumArgs) {
3001   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I)
3002     if (Args[I].isPackExpansion())
3003       return true;
3004 
3005   return true;
3006 }
3007 #endif
3008 
3009 QualType
3010 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
3011                                           const TemplateArgument *Args,
3012                                           unsigned NumArgs,
3013                                           QualType Underlying) const {
3014   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
3015          "No dependent template names here!");
3016   // Look through qualified template names.
3017   if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName())
3018     Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl());
3019 
3020   bool IsTypeAlias =
3021     Template.getAsTemplateDecl() &&
3022     isa<TypeAliasTemplateDecl>(Template.getAsTemplateDecl());
3023   QualType CanonType;
3024   if (!Underlying.isNull())
3025     CanonType = getCanonicalType(Underlying);
3026   else {
3027     // We can get here with an alias template when the specialization contains
3028     // a pack expansion that does not match up with a parameter pack.
3029     assert((!IsTypeAlias || hasAnyPackExpansions(Args, NumArgs)) &&
3030            "Caller must compute aliased type");
3031     IsTypeAlias = false;
3032     CanonType = getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args,
3033                                                        NumArgs);
3034   }
3035 
3036   // Allocate the (non-canonical) template specialization type, but don't
3037   // try to unique it: these types typically have location information that
3038   // we don't unique and don't want to lose.
3039   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) +
3040                        sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs +
3041                        (IsTypeAlias? sizeof(QualType) : 0),
3042                        TypeAlignment);
3043   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec
3044     = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args, NumArgs, CanonType,
3045                                          IsTypeAlias ? Underlying : QualType());
3046 
3047   Types.push_back(Spec);
3048   return QualType(Spec, 0);
3049 }
3050 
3051 QualType
3052 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
3053                                                    const TemplateArgument *Args,
3054                                                    unsigned NumArgs) const {
3055   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
3056          "No dependent template names here!");
3057 
3058   // Look through qualified template names.
3059   if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName())
3060     Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl());
3061 
3062   // Build the canonical template specialization type.
3063   TemplateName CanonTemplate = getCanonicalTemplateName(Template);
3064   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> CanonArgs;
3065   CanonArgs.reserve(NumArgs);
3066   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I)
3067     CanonArgs.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]));
3068 
3069   // Determine whether this canonical template specialization type already
3070   // exists.
3071   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3072   TemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, CanonTemplate,
3073                                       CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs, *this);
3074 
3075   void *InsertPos = 0;
3076   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec
3077     = TemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3078 
3079   if (!Spec) {
3080     // Allocate a new canonical template specialization type.
3081     void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) +
3082                           sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs),
3083                          TypeAlignment);
3084     Spec = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(CanonTemplate,
3085                                                 CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs,
3086                                                 QualType(), QualType());
3087     Types.push_back(Spec);
3088     TemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(Spec, InsertPos);
3089   }
3090 
3091   assert(Spec->isDependentType() &&
3092          "Non-dependent template-id type must have a canonical type");
3093   return QualType(Spec, 0);
3094 }
3095 
3096 QualType
3097 ASTContext::getElaboratedType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
3098                               NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
3099                               QualType NamedType) const {
3100   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3101   ElaboratedType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, NamedType);
3102 
3103   void *InsertPos = 0;
3104   ElaboratedType *T = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3105   if (T)
3106     return QualType(T, 0);
3107 
3108   QualType Canon = NamedType;
3109   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) {
3110     Canon = getCanonicalType(NamedType);
3111     ElaboratedType *CheckT = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3112     assert(!CheckT && "Elaborated canonical type broken");
3113     (void)CheckT;
3114   }
3115 
3116   T = new (*this) ElaboratedType(Keyword, NNS, NamedType, Canon);
3117   Types.push_back(T);
3118   ElaboratedTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3119   return QualType(T, 0);
3120 }
3121 
3122 QualType
3123 ASTContext::getParenType(QualType InnerType) const {
3124   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3125   ParenType::Profile(ID, InnerType);
3126 
3127   void *InsertPos = 0;
3128   ParenType *T = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3129   if (T)
3130     return QualType(T, 0);
3131 
3132   QualType Canon = InnerType;
3133   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) {
3134     Canon = getCanonicalType(InnerType);
3135     ParenType *CheckT = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3136     assert(!CheckT && "Paren canonical type broken");
3137     (void)CheckT;
3138   }
3139 
3140   T = new (*this) ParenType(InnerType, Canon);
3141   Types.push_back(T);
3142   ParenTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3143   return QualType(T, 0);
3144 }
3145 
3146 QualType ASTContext::getDependentNameType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
3147                                           NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
3148                                           const IdentifierInfo *Name,
3149                                           QualType Canon) const {
3150   assert(NNS->isDependent() && "nested-name-specifier must be dependent");
3151 
3152   if (Canon.isNull()) {
3153     NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
3154     ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword;
3155     if (Keyword == ETK_None)
3156       CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename;
3157 
3158     if (CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword)
3159       Canon = getDependentNameType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS, Name);
3160   }
3161 
3162   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3163   DependentNameType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, Name);
3164 
3165   void *InsertPos = 0;
3166   DependentNameType *T
3167     = DependentNameTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3168   if (T)
3169     return QualType(T, 0);
3170 
3171   T = new (*this) DependentNameType(Keyword, NNS, Name, Canon);
3172   Types.push_back(T);
3173   DependentNameTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3174   return QualType(T, 0);
3175 }
3176 
3177 QualType
3178 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(
3179                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
3180                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
3181                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name,
3182                                  const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args) const {
3183   // TODO: avoid this copy
3184   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> ArgCopy;
3185   for (unsigned I = 0, E = Args.size(); I != E; ++I)
3186     ArgCopy.push_back(Args[I].getArgument());
3187   return getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS, Name,
3188                                                 ArgCopy.size(),
3189                                                 ArgCopy.data());
3190 }
3191 
3192 QualType
3193 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(
3194                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
3195                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
3196                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name,
3197                                  unsigned NumArgs,
3198                                  const TemplateArgument *Args) const {
3199   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
3200          "nested-name-specifier must be dependent");
3201 
3202   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3203   DependentTemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, *this, Keyword, NNS,
3204                                                Name, NumArgs, Args);
3205 
3206   void *InsertPos = 0;
3207   DependentTemplateSpecializationType *T
3208     = DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3209   if (T)
3210     return QualType(T, 0);
3211 
3212   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
3213 
3214   ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword;
3215   if (Keyword == ETK_None) CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename;
3216 
3217   bool AnyNonCanonArgs = false;
3218   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> CanonArgs(NumArgs);
3219   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I) {
3220     CanonArgs[I] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]);
3221     if (!CanonArgs[I].structurallyEquals(Args[I]))
3222       AnyNonCanonArgs = true;
3223   }
3224 
3225   QualType Canon;
3226   if (AnyNonCanonArgs || CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword) {
3227     Canon = getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS,
3228                                                    Name, NumArgs,
3229                                                    CanonArgs.data());
3230 
3231     // Find the insert position again.
3232     DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3233   }
3234 
3235   void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(DependentTemplateSpecializationType) +
3236                         sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs),
3237                        TypeAlignment);
3238   T = new (Mem) DependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS,
3239                                                     Name, NumArgs, Args, Canon);
3240   Types.push_back(T);
3241   DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3242   return QualType(T, 0);
3243 }
3244 
3245 QualType ASTContext::getPackExpansionType(QualType Pattern,
3246                                           Optional<unsigned> NumExpansions) {
3247   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3248   PackExpansionType::Profile(ID, Pattern, NumExpansions);
3249 
3250   assert(Pattern->containsUnexpandedParameterPack() &&
3251          "Pack expansions must expand one or more parameter packs");
3252   void *InsertPos = 0;
3253   PackExpansionType *T
3254     = PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3255   if (T)
3256     return QualType(T, 0);
3257 
3258   QualType Canon;
3259   if (!Pattern.isCanonical()) {
3260     Canon = getCanonicalType(Pattern);
3261     // The canonical type might not contain an unexpanded parameter pack, if it
3262     // contains an alias template specialization which ignores one of its
3263     // parameters.
3264     if (Canon->containsUnexpandedParameterPack()) {
3265       Canon = getPackExpansionType(getCanonicalType(Pattern), NumExpansions);
3266 
3267       // Find the insert position again, in case we inserted an element into
3268       // PackExpansionTypes and invalidated our insert position.
3269       PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3270     }
3271   }
3272 
3273   T = new (*this) PackExpansionType(Pattern, Canon, NumExpansions);
3274   Types.push_back(T);
3275   PackExpansionTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3276   return QualType(T, 0);
3277 }
3278 
3279 /// CmpProtocolNames - Comparison predicate for sorting protocols
3280 /// alphabetically.
3281 static bool CmpProtocolNames(const ObjCProtocolDecl *LHS,
3282                             const ObjCProtocolDecl *RHS) {
3283   return LHS->getDeclName() < RHS->getDeclName();
3284 }
3285 
3286 static bool areSortedAndUniqued(ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols,
3287                                 unsigned NumProtocols) {
3288   if (NumProtocols == 0) return true;
3289 
3290   if (Protocols[0]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[0])
3291     return false;
3292 
3293   for (unsigned i = 1; i != NumProtocols; ++i)
3294     if (!CmpProtocolNames(Protocols[i-1], Protocols[i]) ||
3295         Protocols[i]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[i])
3296       return false;
3297   return true;
3298 }
3299 
3300 static void SortAndUniqueProtocols(ObjCProtocolDecl **Protocols,
3301                                    unsigned &NumProtocols) {
3302   ObjCProtocolDecl **ProtocolsEnd = Protocols+NumProtocols;
3303 
3304   // Sort protocols, keyed by name.
3305   std::sort(Protocols, Protocols+NumProtocols, CmpProtocolNames);
3306 
3307   // Canonicalize.
3308   for (unsigned I = 0, N = NumProtocols; I != N; ++I)
3309     Protocols[I] = Protocols[I]->getCanonicalDecl();
3310 
3311   // Remove duplicates.
3312   ProtocolsEnd = std::unique(Protocols, ProtocolsEnd);
3313   NumProtocols = ProtocolsEnd-Protocols;
3314 }
3315 
3316 QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectType(QualType BaseType,
3317                                        ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols,
3318                                        unsigned NumProtocols) const {
3319   // If the base type is an interface and there aren't any protocols
3320   // to add, then the interface type will do just fine.
3321   if (!NumProtocols && isa<ObjCInterfaceType>(BaseType))
3322     return BaseType;
3323 
3324   // Look in the folding set for an existing type.
3325   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3326   ObjCObjectTypeImpl::Profile(ID, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols);
3327   void *InsertPos = 0;
3328   if (ObjCObjectType *QT = ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3329     return QualType(QT, 0);
3330 
3331   // Build the canonical type, which has the canonical base type and
3332   // a sorted-and-uniqued list of protocols.
3333   QualType Canonical;
3334   bool ProtocolsSorted = areSortedAndUniqued(Protocols, NumProtocols);
3335   if (!ProtocolsSorted || !BaseType.isCanonical()) {
3336     if (!ProtocolsSorted) {
3337       SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> Sorted(Protocols,
3338                                                      Protocols + NumProtocols);
3339       unsigned UniqueCount = NumProtocols;
3340 
3341       SortAndUniqueProtocols(&Sorted[0], UniqueCount);
3342       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType),
3343                                     &Sorted[0], UniqueCount);
3344     } else {
3345       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType),
3346                                     Protocols, NumProtocols);
3347     }
3348 
3349     // Regenerate InsertPos.
3350     ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3351   }
3352 
3353   unsigned Size = sizeof(ObjCObjectTypeImpl);
3354   Size += NumProtocols * sizeof(ObjCProtocolDecl *);
3355   void *Mem = Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment);
3356   ObjCObjectTypeImpl *T =
3357     new (Mem) ObjCObjectTypeImpl(Canonical, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols);
3358 
3359   Types.push_back(T);
3360   ObjCObjectTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3361   return QualType(T, 0);
3362 }
3363 
3364 /// getObjCObjectPointerType - Return a ObjCObjectPointerType type for
3365 /// the given object type.
3366 QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectPointerType(QualType ObjectT) const {
3367   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3368   ObjCObjectPointerType::Profile(ID, ObjectT);
3369 
3370   void *InsertPos = 0;
3371   if (ObjCObjectPointerType *QT =
3372               ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3373     return QualType(QT, 0);
3374 
3375   // Find the canonical object type.
3376   QualType Canonical;
3377   if (!ObjectT.isCanonical()) {
3378     Canonical = getObjCObjectPointerType(getCanonicalType(ObjectT));
3379 
3380     // Regenerate InsertPos.
3381     ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3382   }
3383 
3384   // No match.
3385   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCObjectPointerType), TypeAlignment);
3386   ObjCObjectPointerType *QType =
3387     new (Mem) ObjCObjectPointerType(Canonical, ObjectT);
3388 
3389   Types.push_back(QType);
3390   ObjCObjectPointerTypes.InsertNode(QType, InsertPos);
3391   return QualType(QType, 0);
3392 }
3393 
3394 /// getObjCInterfaceType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
3395 /// specified ObjC interface decl. The list of protocols is optional.
3396 QualType ASTContext::getObjCInterfaceType(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl,
3397                                           ObjCInterfaceDecl *PrevDecl) const {
3398   if (Decl->TypeForDecl)
3399     return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
3400 
3401   if (PrevDecl) {
3402     assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous decl has no TypeForDecl");
3403     Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl;
3404     return QualType(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
3405   }
3406 
3407   // Prefer the definition, if there is one.
3408   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Def = Decl->getDefinition())
3409     Decl = Def;
3410 
3411   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCInterfaceType), TypeAlignment);
3412   ObjCInterfaceType *T = new (Mem) ObjCInterfaceType(Decl);
3413   Decl->TypeForDecl = T;
3414   Types.push_back(T);
3415   return QualType(T, 0);
3416 }
3417 
3418 /// getTypeOfExprType - Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we can't unique
3419 /// TypeOfExprType AST's (since expression's are never shared). For example,
3420 /// multiple declarations that refer to "typeof(x)" all contain different
3421 /// DeclRefExpr's. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3422 /// on canonical type's (which are always unique).
3423 QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfExprType(Expr *tofExpr) const {
3424   TypeOfExprType *toe;
3425   if (tofExpr->isTypeDependent()) {
3426     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3427     DependentTypeOfExprType::Profile(ID, *this, tofExpr);
3428 
3429     void *InsertPos = 0;
3430     DependentTypeOfExprType *Canon
3431       = DependentTypeOfExprTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3432     if (Canon) {
3433       // We already have a "canonical" version of an identical, dependent
3434       // typeof(expr) type. Use that as our canonical type.
3435       toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr,
3436                                           QualType((TypeOfExprType*)Canon, 0));
3437     } else {
3438       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type.
3439       Canon
3440         = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentTypeOfExprType(*this, tofExpr);
3441       DependentTypeOfExprTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos);
3442       toe = Canon;
3443     }
3444   } else {
3445     QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofExpr->getType());
3446     toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr, Canonical);
3447   }
3448   Types.push_back(toe);
3449   return QualType(toe, 0);
3450 }
3451 
3452 /// getTypeOfType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique
3453 /// TypeOfType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be
3454 /// memory savings. Since typeof(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be
3455 /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3456 /// on canonical type's (which are always unique).
3457 QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfType(QualType tofType) const {
3458   QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofType);
3459   TypeOfType *tot = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfType(tofType, Canonical);
3460   Types.push_back(tot);
3461   return QualType(tot, 0);
3462 }
3463 
3464 
3465 /// getDecltypeType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique
3466 /// DecltypeType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be
3467 /// memory savings. Since decltype(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be
3468 /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3469 /// on canonical types (which are always unique).
3470 QualType ASTContext::getDecltypeType(Expr *e, QualType UnderlyingType) const {
3471   DecltypeType *dt;
3472 
3473   // C++0x [temp.type]p2:
3474   //   If an expression e involves a template parameter, decltype(e) denotes a
3475   //   unique dependent type. Two such decltype-specifiers refer to the same
3476   //   type only if their expressions are equivalent (14.5.6.1).
3477   if (e->isInstantiationDependent()) {
3478     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3479     DependentDecltypeType::Profile(ID, *this, e);
3480 
3481     void *InsertPos = 0;
3482     DependentDecltypeType *Canon
3483       = DependentDecltypeTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3484     if (Canon) {
3485       // We already have a "canonical" version of an equivalent, dependent
3486       // decltype type. Use that as our canonical type.
3487       dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, UnderlyingType,
3488                                        QualType((DecltypeType*)Canon, 0));
3489     } else {
3490       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type.
3491       Canon = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentDecltypeType(*this, e);
3492       DependentDecltypeTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos);
3493       dt = Canon;
3494     }
3495   } else {
3496     dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, UnderlyingType,
3497                                       getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType));
3498   }
3499   Types.push_back(dt);
3500   return QualType(dt, 0);
3501 }
3502 
3503 /// getUnaryTransformationType - We don't unique these, since the memory
3504 /// savings are minimal and these are rare.
3505 QualType ASTContext::getUnaryTransformType(QualType BaseType,
3506                                            QualType UnderlyingType,
3507                                            UnaryTransformType::UTTKind Kind)
3508     const {
3509   UnaryTransformType *Ty =
3510     new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnaryTransformType (BaseType, UnderlyingType,
3511                                                    Kind,
3512                                  UnderlyingType->isDependentType() ?
3513                                  QualType() : getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType));
3514   Types.push_back(Ty);
3515   return QualType(Ty, 0);
3516 }
3517 
3518 /// getAutoType - We only unique auto types after they've been deduced.
3519 QualType ASTContext::getAutoType(QualType DeducedType) const {
3520   void *InsertPos = 0;
3521   if (!DeducedType.isNull()) {
3522     // Look in the folding set for an existing type.
3523     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3524     AutoType::Profile(ID, DeducedType);
3525     if (AutoType *AT = AutoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3526       return QualType(AT, 0);
3527   }
3528 
3529   AutoType *AT = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AutoType(DeducedType);
3530   Types.push_back(AT);
3531   if (InsertPos)
3532     AutoTypes.InsertNode(AT, InsertPos);
3533   return QualType(AT, 0);
3534 }
3535 
3536 /// getAtomicType - Return the uniqued reference to the atomic type for
3537 /// the given value type.
3538 QualType ASTContext::getAtomicType(QualType T) const {
3539   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
3540   // structure.
3541   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3542   AtomicType::Profile(ID, T);
3543 
3544   void *InsertPos = 0;
3545   if (AtomicType *AT = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3546     return QualType(AT, 0);
3547 
3548   // If the atomic value type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
3549   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
3550   QualType Canonical;
3551   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
3552     Canonical = getAtomicType(getCanonicalType(T));
3553 
3554     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
3555     AtomicType *NewIP = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3556     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
3557   }
3558   AtomicType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AtomicType(T, Canonical);
3559   Types.push_back(New);
3560   AtomicTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
3561   return QualType(New, 0);
3562 }
3563 
3564 /// getAutoDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto'.
3565 QualType ASTContext::getAutoDeductType() const {
3566   if (AutoDeductTy.isNull())
3567     AutoDeductTy = getAutoType(QualType());
3568   assert(!AutoDeductTy.isNull() && "can't build 'auto' pattern");
3569   return AutoDeductTy;
3570 }
3571 
3572 /// getAutoRRefDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto &&'.
3573 QualType ASTContext::getAutoRRefDeductType() const {
3574   if (AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull())
3575     AutoRRefDeductTy = getRValueReferenceType(getAutoDeductType());
3576   assert(!AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull() && "can't build 'auto &&' pattern");
3577   return AutoRRefDeductTy;
3578 }
3579 
3580 /// getTagDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
3581 /// specified TagDecl (struct/union/class/enum) decl.
3582 QualType ASTContext::getTagDeclType(const TagDecl *Decl) const {
3583   assert (Decl);
3584   // FIXME: What is the design on getTagDeclType when it requires casting
3585   // away const?  mutable?
3586   return getTypeDeclType(const_cast<TagDecl*>(Decl));
3587 }
3588 
3589 /// getSizeType - Return the unique type for "size_t" (C99 7.17), the result
3590 /// of the sizeof operator (C99 6.5.3.4p4). The value is target dependent and
3591 /// needs to agree with the definition in <stddef.h>.
3592 CanQualType ASTContext::getSizeType() const {
3593   return getFromTargetType(Target->getSizeType());
3594 }
3595 
3596 /// getIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "intmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5).
3597 CanQualType ASTContext::getIntMaxType() const {
3598   return getFromTargetType(Target->getIntMaxType());
3599 }
3600 
3601 /// getUIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "uintmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5).
3602 CanQualType ASTContext::getUIntMaxType() const {
3603   return getFromTargetType(Target->getUIntMaxType());
3604 }
3605 
3606 /// getSignedWCharType - Return the type of "signed wchar_t".
3607 /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension.
3608 QualType ASTContext::getSignedWCharType() const {
3609   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ?
3610   return WCharTy;
3611 }
3612 
3613 /// getUnsignedWCharType - Return the type of "unsigned wchar_t".
3614 /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension.
3615 QualType ASTContext::getUnsignedWCharType() const {
3616   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ?
3617   return UnsignedIntTy;
3618 }
3619 
3620 QualType ASTContext::getIntPtrType() const {
3621   return getFromTargetType(Target->getIntPtrType());
3622 }
3623 
3624 QualType ASTContext::getUIntPtrType() const {
3625   return getCorrespondingUnsignedType(getIntPtrType());
3626 }
3627 
3628 /// getPointerDiffType - Return the unique type for "ptrdiff_t" (C99 7.17)
3629 /// defined in <stddef.h>. Pointer - pointer requires this (C99 6.5.6p9).
3630 QualType ASTContext::getPointerDiffType() const {
3631   return getFromTargetType(Target->getPtrDiffType(0));
3632 }
3633 
3634 /// \brief Return the unique type for "pid_t" defined in
3635 /// <sys/types.h>. We need this to compute the correct type for vfork().
3636 QualType ASTContext::getProcessIDType() const {
3637   return getFromTargetType(Target->getProcessIDType());
3638 }
3639 
3640 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3641 //                              Type Operators
3642 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3643 
3644 CanQualType ASTContext::getCanonicalParamType(QualType T) const {
3645   // Push qualifiers into arrays, and then discard any remaining
3646   // qualifiers.
3647   T = getCanonicalType(T);
3648   T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T);
3649   const Type *Ty = T.getTypePtr();
3650   QualType Result;
3651   if (isa<ArrayType>(Ty)) {
3652     Result = getArrayDecayedType(QualType(Ty,0));
3653   } else if (isa<FunctionType>(Ty)) {
3654     Result = getPointerType(QualType(Ty, 0));
3655   } else {
3656     Result = QualType(Ty, 0);
3657   }
3658 
3659   return CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(Result);
3660 }
3661 
3662 QualType ASTContext::getUnqualifiedArrayType(QualType type,
3663                                              Qualifiers &quals) {
3664   SplitQualType splitType = type.getSplitUnqualifiedType();
3665 
3666   // FIXME: getSplitUnqualifiedType() actually walks all the way to
3667   // the unqualified desugared type and then drops it on the floor.
3668   // We then have to strip that sugar back off with
3669   // getUnqualifiedDesugaredType(), which is silly.
3670   const ArrayType *AT =
3671     dyn_cast<ArrayType>(splitType.Ty->getUnqualifiedDesugaredType());
3672 
3673   // If we don't have an array, just use the results in splitType.
3674   if (!AT) {
3675     quals = splitType.Quals;
3676     return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0);
3677   }
3678 
3679   // Otherwise, recurse on the array's element type.
3680   QualType elementType = AT->getElementType();
3681   QualType unqualElementType = getUnqualifiedArrayType(elementType, quals);
3682 
3683   // If that didn't change the element type, AT has no qualifiers, so we
3684   // can just use the results in splitType.
3685   if (elementType == unqualElementType) {
3686     assert(quals.empty()); // from the recursive call
3687     quals = splitType.Quals;
3688     return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0);
3689   }
3690 
3691   // Otherwise, add in the qualifiers from the outermost type, then
3692   // build the type back up.
3693   quals.addConsistentQualifiers(splitType.Quals);
3694 
3695   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) {
3696     return getConstantArrayType(unqualElementType, CAT->getSize(),
3697                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(), 0);
3698   }
3699 
3700   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) {
3701     return getIncompleteArrayType(unqualElementType, IAT->getSizeModifier(), 0);
3702   }
3703 
3704   if (const VariableArrayType *VAT = dyn_cast<VariableArrayType>(AT)) {
3705     return getVariableArrayType(unqualElementType,
3706                                 VAT->getSizeExpr(),
3707                                 VAT->getSizeModifier(),
3708                                 VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3709                                 VAT->getBracketsRange());
3710   }
3711 
3712   const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(AT);
3713   return getDependentSizedArrayType(unqualElementType, DSAT->getSizeExpr(),
3714                                     DSAT->getSizeModifier(), 0,
3715                                     SourceRange());
3716 }
3717 
3718 /// UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes - If T1 and T2 are pointer types  that
3719 /// may be similar (C++ 4.4), replaces T1 and T2 with the type that
3720 /// they point to and return true. If T1 and T2 aren't pointer types
3721 /// or pointer-to-member types, or if they are not similar at this
3722 /// level, returns false and leaves T1 and T2 unchanged. Top-level
3723 /// qualifiers on T1 and T2 are ignored. This function will typically
3724 /// be called in a loop that successively "unwraps" pointer and
3725 /// pointer-to-member types to compare them at each level.
3726 bool ASTContext::UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes(QualType &T1, QualType &T2) {
3727   const PointerType *T1PtrType = T1->getAs<PointerType>(),
3728                     *T2PtrType = T2->getAs<PointerType>();
3729   if (T1PtrType && T2PtrType) {
3730     T1 = T1PtrType->getPointeeType();
3731     T2 = T2PtrType->getPointeeType();
3732     return true;
3733   }
3734 
3735   const MemberPointerType *T1MPType = T1->getAs<MemberPointerType>(),
3736                           *T2MPType = T2->getAs<MemberPointerType>();
3737   if (T1MPType && T2MPType &&
3738       hasSameUnqualifiedType(QualType(T1MPType->getClass(), 0),
3739                              QualType(T2MPType->getClass(), 0))) {
3740     T1 = T1MPType->getPointeeType();
3741     T2 = T2MPType->getPointeeType();
3742     return true;
3743   }
3744 
3745   if (getLangOpts().ObjC1) {
3746     const ObjCObjectPointerType *T1OPType = T1->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
3747                                 *T2OPType = T2->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
3748     if (T1OPType && T2OPType) {
3749       T1 = T1OPType->getPointeeType();
3750       T2 = T2OPType->getPointeeType();
3751       return true;
3752     }
3753   }
3754 
3755   // FIXME: Block pointers, too?
3756 
3757   return false;
3758 }
3759 
3760 DeclarationNameInfo
3761 ASTContext::getNameForTemplate(TemplateName Name,
3762                                SourceLocation NameLoc) const {
3763   switch (Name.getKind()) {
3764   case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate:
3765   case TemplateName::Template:
3766     // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc?
3767     return DeclarationNameInfo(Name.getAsTemplateDecl()->getDeclName(),
3768                                NameLoc);
3769 
3770   case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate: {
3771     OverloadedTemplateStorage *Storage = Name.getAsOverloadedTemplate();
3772     // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc?
3773     return DeclarationNameInfo((*Storage->begin())->getDeclName(), NameLoc);
3774   }
3775 
3776   case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: {
3777     DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName();
3778     DeclarationName DName;
3779     if (DTN->isIdentifier()) {
3780       DName = DeclarationNames.getIdentifier(DTN->getIdentifier());
3781       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc);
3782     } else {
3783       DName = DeclarationNames.getCXXOperatorName(DTN->getOperator());
3784       // DNInfo work in progress: FIXME: source locations?
3785       DeclarationNameLoc DNLoc;
3786       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.BeginOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding();
3787       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.EndOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding();
3788       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc, DNLoc);
3789     }
3790   }
3791 
3792   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: {
3793     SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
3794       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm();
3795     return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameter()->getDeclName(),
3796                                NameLoc);
3797   }
3798 
3799   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: {
3800     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst
3801       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack();
3802     return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameterPack()->getDeclName(),
3803                                NameLoc);
3804   }
3805   }
3806 
3807   llvm_unreachable("bad template name kind!");
3808 }
3809 
3810 TemplateName ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateName(TemplateName Name) const {
3811   switch (Name.getKind()) {
3812   case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate:
3813   case TemplateName::Template: {
3814     TemplateDecl *Template = Name.getAsTemplateDecl();
3815     if (TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP
3816           = dyn_cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(Template))
3817       Template = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(TTP);
3818 
3819     // The canonical template name is the canonical template declaration.
3820     return TemplateName(cast<TemplateDecl>(Template->getCanonicalDecl()));
3821   }
3822 
3823   case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate:
3824     llvm_unreachable("cannot canonicalize overloaded template");
3825 
3826   case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: {
3827     DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName();
3828     assert(DTN && "Non-dependent template names must refer to template decls.");
3829     return DTN->CanonicalTemplateName;
3830   }
3831 
3832   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: {
3833     SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
3834       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm();
3835     return getCanonicalTemplateName(subst->getReplacement());
3836   }
3837 
3838   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: {
3839     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst
3840                                   = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack();
3841     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *canonParameter
3842       = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(subst->getParameterPack());
3843     TemplateArgument canonArgPack
3844       = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(subst->getArgumentPack());
3845     return getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(canonParameter, canonArgPack);
3846   }
3847   }
3848 
3849   llvm_unreachable("bad template name!");
3850 }
3851 
3852 bool ASTContext::hasSameTemplateName(TemplateName X, TemplateName Y) {
3853   X = getCanonicalTemplateName(X);
3854   Y = getCanonicalTemplateName(Y);
3855   return X.getAsVoidPointer() == Y.getAsVoidPointer();
3856 }
3857 
3858 TemplateArgument
3859 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateArgument(const TemplateArgument &Arg) const {
3860   switch (Arg.getKind()) {
3861     case TemplateArgument::Null:
3862       return Arg;
3863 
3864     case TemplateArgument::Expression:
3865       return Arg;
3866 
3867     case TemplateArgument::Declaration: {
3868       ValueDecl *D = cast<ValueDecl>(Arg.getAsDecl()->getCanonicalDecl());
3869       return TemplateArgument(D, Arg.isDeclForReferenceParam());
3870     }
3871 
3872     case TemplateArgument::NullPtr:
3873       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalType(Arg.getNullPtrType()),
3874                               /*isNullPtr*/true);
3875 
3876     case TemplateArgument::Template:
3877       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(Arg.getAsTemplate()));
3878 
3879     case TemplateArgument::TemplateExpansion:
3880       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(
3881                                          Arg.getAsTemplateOrTemplatePattern()),
3882                               Arg.getNumTemplateExpansions());
3883 
3884     case TemplateArgument::Integral:
3885       return TemplateArgument(Arg, getCanonicalType(Arg.getIntegralType()));
3886 
3887     case TemplateArgument::Type:
3888       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalType(Arg.getAsType()));
3889 
3890     case TemplateArgument::Pack: {
3891       if (Arg.pack_size() == 0)
3892         return Arg;
3893 
3894       TemplateArgument *CanonArgs
3895         = new (*this) TemplateArgument[Arg.pack_size()];
3896       unsigned Idx = 0;
3897       for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator A = Arg.pack_begin(),
3898                                         AEnd = Arg.pack_end();
3899            A != AEnd; (void)++A, ++Idx)
3900         CanonArgs[Idx] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(*A);
3901 
3902       return TemplateArgument(CanonArgs, Arg.pack_size());
3903     }
3904   }
3905 
3906   // Silence GCC warning
3907   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled template argument kind");
3908 }
3909 
3910 NestedNameSpecifier *
3911 ASTContext::getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS) const {
3912   if (!NNS)
3913     return 0;
3914 
3915   switch (NNS->getKind()) {
3916   case NestedNameSpecifier::Identifier:
3917     // Canonicalize the prefix but keep the identifier the same.
3918     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this,
3919                          getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS->getPrefix()),
3920                                        NNS->getAsIdentifier());
3921 
3922   case NestedNameSpecifier::Namespace:
3923     // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with
3924     // this namespace and no prefix.
3925     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0,
3926                                  NNS->getAsNamespace()->getOriginalNamespace());
3927 
3928   case NestedNameSpecifier::NamespaceAlias:
3929     // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with
3930     // this namespace and no prefix.
3931     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0,
3932                                     NNS->getAsNamespaceAlias()->getNamespace()
3933                                                       ->getOriginalNamespace());
3934 
3935   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpec:
3936   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpecWithTemplate: {
3937     QualType T = getCanonicalType(QualType(NNS->getAsType(), 0));
3938 
3939     // If we have some kind of dependent-named type (e.g., "typename T::type"),
3940     // break it apart into its prefix and identifier, then reconsititute those
3941     // as the canonical nested-name-specifier. This is required to canonicalize
3942     // a dependent nested-name-specifier involving typedefs of dependent-name
3943     // types, e.g.,
3944     //   typedef typename T::type T1;
3945     //   typedef typename T1::type T2;
3946     if (const DependentNameType *DNT = T->getAs<DependentNameType>())
3947       return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, DNT->getQualifier(),
3948                            const_cast<IdentifierInfo *>(DNT->getIdentifier()));
3949 
3950     // Otherwise, just canonicalize the type, and force it to be a TypeSpec.
3951     // FIXME: Why are TypeSpec and TypeSpecWithTemplate distinct in the
3952     // first place?
3953     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0, false,
3954                                        const_cast<Type*>(T.getTypePtr()));
3955   }
3956 
3957   case NestedNameSpecifier::Global:
3958     // The global specifier is canonical and unique.
3959     return NNS;
3960   }
3961 
3962   llvm_unreachable("Invalid NestedNameSpecifier::Kind!");
3963 }
3964 
3965 
3966 const ArrayType *ASTContext::getAsArrayType(QualType T) const {
3967   // Handle the non-qualified case efficiently.
3968   if (!T.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
3969     // Handle the common positive case fast.
3970     if (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(T))
3971       return AT;
3972   }
3973 
3974   // Handle the common negative case fast.
3975   if (!isa<ArrayType>(T.getCanonicalType()))
3976     return 0;
3977 
3978   // Apply any qualifiers from the array type to the element type.  This
3979   // implements C99 6.7.3p8: "If the specification of an array type includes
3980   // any type qualifiers, the element type is so qualified, not the array type."
3981 
3982   // If we get here, we either have type qualifiers on the type, or we have
3983   // sugar such as a typedef in the way.  If we have type qualifiers on the type
3984   // we must propagate them down into the element type.
3985 
3986   SplitQualType split = T.getSplitDesugaredType();
3987   Qualifiers qs = split.Quals;
3988 
3989   // If we have a simple case, just return now.
3990   const ArrayType *ATy = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(split.Ty);
3991   if (ATy == 0 || qs.empty())
3992     return ATy;
3993 
3994   // Otherwise, we have an array and we have qualifiers on it.  Push the
3995   // qualifiers into the array element type and return a new array type.
3996   QualType NewEltTy = getQualifiedType(ATy->getElementType(), qs);
3997 
3998   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(ATy))
3999     return cast<ArrayType>(getConstantArrayType(NewEltTy, CAT->getSize(),
4000                                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(),
4001                                            CAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()));
4002   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ATy))
4003     return cast<ArrayType>(getIncompleteArrayType(NewEltTy,
4004                                                   IAT->getSizeModifier(),
4005                                            IAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()));
4006 
4007   if (const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT
4008         = dyn_cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ATy))
4009     return cast<ArrayType>(
4010                      getDependentSizedArrayType(NewEltTy,
4011                                                 DSAT->getSizeExpr(),
4012                                                 DSAT->getSizeModifier(),
4013                                               DSAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
4014                                                 DSAT->getBracketsRange()));
4015 
4016   const VariableArrayType *VAT = cast<VariableArrayType>(ATy);
4017   return cast<ArrayType>(getVariableArrayType(NewEltTy,
4018                                               VAT->getSizeExpr(),
4019                                               VAT->getSizeModifier(),
4020                                               VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
4021                                               VAT->getBracketsRange()));
4022 }
4023 
4024 QualType ASTContext::getAdjustedParameterType(QualType T) const {
4025   // C99 6.7.5.3p7:
4026   //   A declaration of a parameter as "array of type" shall be
4027   //   adjusted to "qualified pointer to type", where the type
4028   //   qualifiers (if any) are those specified within the [ and ] of
4029   //   the array type derivation.
4030   if (T->isArrayType())
4031     return getArrayDecayedType(T);
4032 
4033   // C99 6.7.5.3p8:
4034   //   A declaration of a parameter as "function returning type"
4035   //   shall be adjusted to "pointer to function returning type", as
4036   //   in 6.3.2.1.
4037   if (T->isFunctionType())
4038     return getPointerType(T);
4039 
4040   return T;
4041 }
4042 
4043 QualType ASTContext::getSignatureParameterType(QualType T) const {
4044   T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T);
4045   T = getAdjustedParameterType(T);
4046   return T.getUnqualifiedType();
4047 }
4048 
4049 /// getArrayDecayedType - Return the properly qualified result of decaying the
4050 /// specified array type to a pointer.  This operation is non-trivial when
4051 /// handling typedefs etc.  The canonical type of "T" must be an array type,
4052 /// this returns a pointer to a properly qualified element of the array.
4053 ///
4054 /// See C99 6.7.5.3p7 and C99 6.3.2.1p3.
4055 QualType ASTContext::getArrayDecayedType(QualType Ty) const {
4056   // Get the element type with 'getAsArrayType' so that we don't lose any
4057   // typedefs in the element type of the array.  This also handles propagation
4058   // of type qualifiers from the array type into the element type if present
4059   // (C99 6.7.3p8).
4060   const ArrayType *PrettyArrayType = getAsArrayType(Ty);
4061   assert(PrettyArrayType && "Not an array type!");
4062 
4063   QualType PtrTy = getPointerType(PrettyArrayType->getElementType());
4064 
4065   // int x[restrict 4] ->  int *restrict
4066   return getQualifiedType(PtrTy, PrettyArrayType->getIndexTypeQualifiers());
4067 }
4068 
4069 QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(const ArrayType *array) const {
4070   return getBaseElementType(array->getElementType());
4071 }
4072 
4073 QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(QualType type) const {
4074   Qualifiers qs;
4075   while (true) {
4076     SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType();
4077     const ArrayType *array = split.Ty->getAsArrayTypeUnsafe();
4078     if (!array) break;
4079 
4080     type = array->getElementType();
4081     qs.addConsistentQualifiers(split.Quals);
4082   }
4083 
4084   return getQualifiedType(type, qs);
4085 }
4086 
4087 /// getConstantArrayElementCount - Returns number of constant array elements.
4088 uint64_t
4089 ASTContext::getConstantArrayElementCount(const ConstantArrayType *CA)  const {
4090   uint64_t ElementCount = 1;
4091   do {
4092     ElementCount *= CA->getSize().getZExtValue();
4093     CA = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantArrayType>(
4094       CA->getElementType()->getAsArrayTypeUnsafe());
4095   } while (CA);
4096   return ElementCount;
4097 }
4098 
4099 /// getFloatingRank - Return a relative rank for floating point types.
4100 /// This routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't a float.
4101 static FloatingRank getFloatingRank(QualType T) {
4102   if (const ComplexType *CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>())
4103     return getFloatingRank(CT->getElementType());
4104 
4105   assert(T->getAs<BuiltinType>() && "getFloatingRank(): not a floating type");
4106   switch (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()->getKind()) {
4107   default: llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): not a floating type");
4108   case BuiltinType::Half:       return HalfRank;
4109   case BuiltinType::Float:      return FloatRank;
4110   case BuiltinType::Double:     return DoubleRank;
4111   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return LongDoubleRank;
4112   }
4113 }
4114 
4115 /// getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain - Returns a real floating
4116 /// point or a complex type (based on typeDomain/typeSize).
4117 /// 'typeDomain' is a real floating point or complex type.
4118 /// 'typeSize' is a real floating point or complex type.
4119 QualType ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain(QualType Size,
4120                                                        QualType Domain) const {
4121   FloatingRank EltRank = getFloatingRank(Size);
4122   if (Domain->isComplexType()) {
4123     switch (EltRank) {
4124     case HalfRank: llvm_unreachable("Complex half is not supported");
4125     case FloatRank:      return FloatComplexTy;
4126     case DoubleRank:     return DoubleComplexTy;
4127     case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleComplexTy;
4128     }
4129   }
4130 
4131   assert(Domain->isRealFloatingType() && "Unknown domain!");
4132   switch (EltRank) {
4133   case HalfRank:       return HalfTy;
4134   case FloatRank:      return FloatTy;
4135   case DoubleRank:     return DoubleTy;
4136   case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleTy;
4137   }
4138   llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): illegal value for rank");
4139 }
4140 
4141 /// getFloatingTypeOrder - Compare the rank of the two specified floating
4142 /// point types, ignoring the domain of the type (i.e. 'double' ==
4143 /// '_Complex double').  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If
4144 /// LHS < RHS, return -1.
4145 int ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const {
4146   FloatingRank LHSR = getFloatingRank(LHS);
4147   FloatingRank RHSR = getFloatingRank(RHS);
4148 
4149   if (LHSR == RHSR)
4150     return 0;
4151   if (LHSR > RHSR)
4152     return 1;
4153   return -1;
4154 }
4155 
4156 /// getIntegerRank - Return an integer conversion rank (C99 6.3.1.1p1). This
4157 /// routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't an integer or enum,
4158 /// or if it is not canonicalized.
4159 unsigned ASTContext::getIntegerRank(const Type *T) const {
4160   assert(T->isCanonicalUnqualified() && "T should be canonicalized");
4161 
4162   switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) {
4163   default: llvm_unreachable("getIntegerRank(): not a built-in integer");
4164   case BuiltinType::Bool:
4165     return 1 + (getIntWidth(BoolTy) << 3);
4166   case BuiltinType::Char_S:
4167   case BuiltinType::Char_U:
4168   case BuiltinType::SChar:
4169   case BuiltinType::UChar:
4170     return 2 + (getIntWidth(CharTy) << 3);
4171   case BuiltinType::Short:
4172   case BuiltinType::UShort:
4173     return 3 + (getIntWidth(ShortTy) << 3);
4174   case BuiltinType::Int:
4175   case BuiltinType::UInt:
4176     return 4 + (getIntWidth(IntTy) << 3);
4177   case BuiltinType::Long:
4178   case BuiltinType::ULong:
4179     return 5 + (getIntWidth(LongTy) << 3);
4180   case BuiltinType::LongLong:
4181   case BuiltinType::ULongLong:
4182     return 6 + (getIntWidth(LongLongTy) << 3);
4183   case BuiltinType::Int128:
4184   case BuiltinType::UInt128:
4185     return 7 + (getIntWidth(Int128Ty) << 3);
4186   }
4187 }
4188 
4189 /// \brief Whether this is a promotable bitfield reference according
4190 /// to C99 6.3.1.1p2, bullet 2 (and GCC extensions).
4191 ///
4192 /// \returns the type this bit-field will promote to, or NULL if no
4193 /// promotion occurs.
4194 QualType ASTContext::isPromotableBitField(Expr *E) const {
4195   if (E->isTypeDependent() || E->isValueDependent())
4196     return QualType();
4197 
4198   FieldDecl *Field = E->getBitField();
4199   if (!Field)
4200     return QualType();
4201 
4202   QualType FT = Field->getType();
4203 
4204   uint64_t BitWidth = Field->getBitWidthValue(*this);
4205   uint64_t IntSize = getTypeSize(IntTy);
4206   // GCC extension compatibility: if the bit-field size is less than or equal
4207   // to the size of int, it gets promoted no matter what its type is.
4208   // For instance, unsigned long bf : 4 gets promoted to signed int.
4209   if (BitWidth < IntSize)
4210     return IntTy;
4211 
4212   if (BitWidth == IntSize)
4213     return FT->isSignedIntegerType() ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy;
4214 
4215   // Types bigger than int are not subject to promotions, and therefore act
4216   // like the base type.
4217   // FIXME: This doesn't quite match what gcc does, but what gcc does here
4218   // is ridiculous.
4219   return QualType();
4220 }
4221 
4222 /// getPromotedIntegerType - Returns the type that Promotable will
4223 /// promote to: C99 6.3.1.1p2, assuming that Promotable is a promotable
4224 /// integer type.
4225 QualType ASTContext::getPromotedIntegerType(QualType Promotable) const {
4226   assert(!Promotable.isNull());
4227   assert(Promotable->isPromotableIntegerType());
4228   if (const EnumType *ET = Promotable->getAs<EnumType>())
4229     return ET->getDecl()->getPromotionType();
4230 
4231   if (const BuiltinType *BT = Promotable->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
4232     // C++ [conv.prom]: A prvalue of type char16_t, char32_t, or wchar_t
4233     // (3.9.1) can be converted to a prvalue of the first of the following
4234     // types that can represent all the values of its underlying type:
4235     // int, unsigned int, long int, unsigned long int, long long int, or
4236     // unsigned long long int [...]
4237     // FIXME: Is there some better way to compute this?
4238     if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S ||
4239         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_U ||
4240         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char16 ||
4241         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char32) {
4242       bool FromIsSigned = BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S;
4243       uint64_t FromSize = getTypeSize(BT);
4244       QualType PromoteTypes[] = { IntTy, UnsignedIntTy, LongTy, UnsignedLongTy,
4245                                   LongLongTy, UnsignedLongLongTy };
4246       for (size_t Idx = 0; Idx < llvm::array_lengthof(PromoteTypes); ++Idx) {
4247         uint64_t ToSize = getTypeSize(PromoteTypes[Idx]);
4248         if (FromSize < ToSize ||
4249             (FromSize == ToSize &&
4250              FromIsSigned == PromoteTypes[Idx]->isSignedIntegerType()))
4251           return PromoteTypes[Idx];
4252       }
4253       llvm_unreachable("char type should fit into long long");
4254     }
4255   }
4256 
4257   // At this point, we should have a signed or unsigned integer type.
4258   if (Promotable->isSignedIntegerType())
4259     return IntTy;
4260   uint64_t PromotableSize = getIntWidth(Promotable);
4261   uint64_t IntSize = getIntWidth(IntTy);
4262   assert(Promotable->isUnsignedIntegerType() && PromotableSize <= IntSize);
4263   return (PromotableSize != IntSize) ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy;
4264 }
4265 
4266 /// \brief Recurses in pointer/array types until it finds an objc retainable
4267 /// type and returns its ownership.
4268 Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime ASTContext::getInnerObjCOwnership(QualType T) const {
4269   while (!T.isNull()) {
4270     if (T.getObjCLifetime() != Qualifiers::OCL_None)
4271       return T.getObjCLifetime();
4272     if (T->isArrayType())
4273       T = getBaseElementType(T);
4274     else if (const PointerType *PT = T->getAs<PointerType>())
4275       T = PT->getPointeeType();
4276     else if (const ReferenceType *RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>())
4277       T = RT->getPointeeType();
4278     else
4279       break;
4280   }
4281 
4282   return Qualifiers::OCL_None;
4283 }
4284 
4285 /// getIntegerTypeOrder - Returns the highest ranked integer type:
4286 /// C99 6.3.1.8p1.  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If
4287 /// LHS < RHS, return -1.
4288 int ASTContext::getIntegerTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const {
4289   const Type *LHSC = getCanonicalType(LHS).getTypePtr();
4290   const Type *RHSC = getCanonicalType(RHS).getTypePtr();
4291   if (LHSC == RHSC) return 0;
4292 
4293   bool LHSUnsigned = LHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType();
4294   bool RHSUnsigned = RHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType();
4295 
4296   unsigned LHSRank = getIntegerRank(LHSC);
4297   unsigned RHSRank = getIntegerRank(RHSC);
4298 
4299   if (LHSUnsigned == RHSUnsigned) {  // Both signed or both unsigned.
4300     if (LHSRank == RHSRank) return 0;
4301     return LHSRank > RHSRank ? 1 : -1;
4302   }
4303 
4304   // Otherwise, the LHS is signed and the RHS is unsigned or visa versa.
4305   if (LHSUnsigned) {
4306     // If the unsigned [LHS] type is larger, return it.
4307     if (LHSRank >= RHSRank)
4308       return 1;
4309 
4310     // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it
4311     // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are
4312     // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe.
4313     return -1;
4314   }
4315 
4316   // If the unsigned [RHS] type is larger, return it.
4317   if (RHSRank >= LHSRank)
4318     return -1;
4319 
4320   // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it
4321   // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are
4322   // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe.
4323   return 1;
4324 }
4325 
4326 static RecordDecl *
4327 CreateRecordDecl(const ASTContext &Ctx, RecordDecl::TagKind TK,
4328                  DeclContext *DC, IdentifierInfo *Id) {
4329   SourceLocation Loc;
4330   if (Ctx.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
4331     return CXXRecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id);
4332   else
4333     return RecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id);
4334 }
4335 
4336 // getCFConstantStringType - Return the type used for constant CFStrings.
4337 QualType ASTContext::getCFConstantStringType() const {
4338   if (!CFConstantStringTypeDecl) {
4339     CFConstantStringTypeDecl =
4340       CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4341                        &Idents.get("NSConstantString"));
4342     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->startDefinition();
4343 
4344     QualType FieldTypes[4];
4345 
4346     // const int *isa;
4347     FieldTypes[0] = getPointerType(IntTy.withConst());
4348     // int flags;
4349     FieldTypes[1] = IntTy;
4350     // const char *str;
4351     FieldTypes[2] = getPointerType(CharTy.withConst());
4352     // long length;
4353     FieldTypes[3] = LongTy;
4354 
4355     // Create fields
4356     for (unsigned i = 0; i < 4; ++i) {
4357       FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, CFConstantStringTypeDecl,
4358                                            SourceLocation(),
4359                                            SourceLocation(), 0,
4360                                            FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4361                                            /*BitWidth=*/0,
4362                                            /*Mutable=*/false,
4363                                            ICIS_NoInit);
4364       Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4365       CFConstantStringTypeDecl->addDecl(Field);
4366     }
4367 
4368     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->completeDefinition();
4369   }
4370 
4371   return getTagDeclType(CFConstantStringTypeDecl);
4372 }
4373 
4374 QualType ASTContext::getObjCSuperType() const {
4375   if (ObjCSuperType.isNull()) {
4376     RecordDecl *ObjCSuperTypeDecl  =
4377       CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, &Idents.get("objc_super"));
4378     TUDecl->addDecl(ObjCSuperTypeDecl);
4379     ObjCSuperType = getTagDeclType(ObjCSuperTypeDecl);
4380   }
4381   return ObjCSuperType;
4382 }
4383 
4384 void ASTContext::setCFConstantStringType(QualType T) {
4385   const RecordType *Rec = T->getAs<RecordType>();
4386   assert(Rec && "Invalid CFConstantStringType");
4387   CFConstantStringTypeDecl = Rec->getDecl();
4388 }
4389 
4390 QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorType() const {
4391   if (BlockDescriptorType)
4392     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType);
4393 
4394   RecordDecl *T;
4395   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit.
4396   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4397                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor"));
4398   T->startDefinition();
4399 
4400   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4401     UnsignedLongTy,
4402     UnsignedLongTy,
4403   };
4404 
4405   const char *FieldNames[] = {
4406     "reserved",
4407     "Size"
4408   };
4409 
4410   for (size_t i = 0; i < 2; ++i) {
4411     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4412                                          SourceLocation(),
4413                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4414                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4415                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
4416                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
4417                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4418     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4419     T->addDecl(Field);
4420   }
4421 
4422   T->completeDefinition();
4423 
4424   BlockDescriptorType = T;
4425 
4426   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType);
4427 }
4428 
4429 QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorExtendedType() const {
4430   if (BlockDescriptorExtendedType)
4431     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType);
4432 
4433   RecordDecl *T;
4434   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit.
4435   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4436                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor_withcopydispose"));
4437   T->startDefinition();
4438 
4439   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4440     UnsignedLongTy,
4441     UnsignedLongTy,
4442     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4443     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy)
4444   };
4445 
4446   const char *FieldNames[] = {
4447     "reserved",
4448     "Size",
4449     "CopyFuncPtr",
4450     "DestroyFuncPtr"
4451   };
4452 
4453   for (size_t i = 0; i < 4; ++i) {
4454     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4455                                          SourceLocation(),
4456                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4457                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4458                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
4459                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
4460                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4461     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4462     T->addDecl(Field);
4463   }
4464 
4465   T->completeDefinition();
4466 
4467   BlockDescriptorExtendedType = T;
4468 
4469   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType);
4470 }
4471 
4472 /// BlockRequiresCopying - Returns true if byref variable "D" of type "Ty"
4473 /// requires copy/dispose. Note that this must match the logic
4474 /// in buildByrefHelpers.
4475 bool ASTContext::BlockRequiresCopying(QualType Ty,
4476                                       const VarDecl *D) {
4477   if (const CXXRecordDecl *record = Ty->getAsCXXRecordDecl()) {
4478     const Expr *copyExpr = getBlockVarCopyInits(D);
4479     if (!copyExpr && record->hasTrivialDestructor()) return false;
4480 
4481     return true;
4482   }
4483 
4484   if (!Ty->isObjCRetainableType()) return false;
4485 
4486   Qualifiers qs = Ty.getQualifiers();
4487 
4488   // If we have lifetime, that dominates.
4489   if (Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime lifetime = qs.getObjCLifetime()) {
4490     assert(getLangOpts().ObjCAutoRefCount);
4491 
4492     switch (lifetime) {
4493       case Qualifiers::OCL_None: llvm_unreachable("impossible");
4494 
4495       // These are just bits as far as the runtime is concerned.
4496       case Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone:
4497       case Qualifiers::OCL_Autoreleasing:
4498         return false;
4499 
4500       // Tell the runtime that this is ARC __weak, called by the
4501       // byref routines.
4502       case Qualifiers::OCL_Weak:
4503       // ARC __strong __block variables need to be retained.
4504       case Qualifiers::OCL_Strong:
4505         return true;
4506     }
4507     llvm_unreachable("fell out of lifetime switch!");
4508   }
4509   return (Ty->isBlockPointerType() || isObjCNSObjectType(Ty) ||
4510           Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType());
4511 }
4512 
4513 bool ASTContext::getByrefLifetime(QualType Ty,
4514                               Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime &LifeTime,
4515                               bool &HasByrefExtendedLayout) const {
4516 
4517   if (!getLangOpts().ObjC1 ||
4518       getLangOpts().getGC() != LangOptions::NonGC)
4519     return false;
4520 
4521   HasByrefExtendedLayout = false;
4522   if (Ty->isRecordType()) {
4523     HasByrefExtendedLayout = true;
4524     LifeTime = Qualifiers::OCL_None;
4525   }
4526   else if (getLangOpts().ObjCAutoRefCount)
4527     LifeTime = Ty.getObjCLifetime();
4528   // MRR.
4529   else if (Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType() || Ty->isBlockPointerType())
4530     LifeTime = Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone;
4531   else
4532     LifeTime = Qualifiers::OCL_None;
4533   return true;
4534 }
4535 
4536 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCInstanceTypeDecl() {
4537   if (!ObjCInstanceTypeDecl)
4538     ObjCInstanceTypeDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(*this,
4539                                                getTranslationUnitDecl(),
4540                                                SourceLocation(),
4541                                                SourceLocation(),
4542                                                &Idents.get("instancetype"),
4543                                      getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(getObjCIdType()));
4544   return ObjCInstanceTypeDecl;
4545 }
4546 
4547 // This returns true if a type has been typedefed to BOOL:
4548 // typedef <type> BOOL;
4549 static bool isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(QualType T) {
4550   if (const TypedefType *TT = dyn_cast<TypedefType>(T))
4551     if (IdentifierInfo *II = TT->getDecl()->getIdentifier())
4552       return II->isStr("BOOL");
4553 
4554   return false;
4555 }
4556 
4557 /// getObjCEncodingTypeSize returns size of type for objective-c encoding
4558 /// purpose.
4559 CharUnits ASTContext::getObjCEncodingTypeSize(QualType type) const {
4560   if (!type->isIncompleteArrayType() && type->isIncompleteType())
4561     return CharUnits::Zero();
4562 
4563   CharUnits sz = getTypeSizeInChars(type);
4564 
4565   // Make all integer and enum types at least as large as an int
4566   if (sz.isPositive() && type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType())
4567     sz = std::max(sz, getTypeSizeInChars(IntTy));
4568   // Treat arrays as pointers, since that's how they're passed in.
4569   else if (type->isArrayType())
4570     sz = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4571   return sz;
4572 }
4573 
4574 static inline
4575 std::string charUnitsToString(const CharUnits &CU) {
4576   return llvm::itostr(CU.getQuantity());
4577 }
4578 
4579 /// getObjCEncodingForBlock - Return the encoded type for this block
4580 /// declaration.
4581 std::string ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForBlock(const BlockExpr *Expr) const {
4582   std::string S;
4583 
4584   const BlockDecl *Decl = Expr->getBlockDecl();
4585   QualType BlockTy =
4586       Expr->getType()->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
4587   // Encode result type.
4588   if (getLangOpts().EncodeExtendedBlockSig)
4589     getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::OBJC_TQ_None,
4590                             BlockTy->getAs<FunctionType>()->getResultType(),
4591                             S, true /*Extended*/);
4592   else
4593     getObjCEncodingForType(BlockTy->getAs<FunctionType>()->getResultType(),
4594                            S);
4595   // Compute size of all parameters.
4596   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes.
4597   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation!
4598   SourceLocation Loc;
4599   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4600   CharUnits ParmOffset = PtrSize;
4601   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4602        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4603     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4604     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4605     if (sz.isZero())
4606       continue;
4607     assert (sz.isPositive() && "BlockExpr - Incomplete param type");
4608     ParmOffset += sz;
4609   }
4610   // Size of the argument frame
4611   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4612   // Block pointer and offset.
4613   S += "@?0";
4614 
4615   // Argument types.
4616   ParmOffset = PtrSize;
4617   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), E =
4618        Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4619     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4620     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4621     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4622           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4623       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4624       // elements.
4625       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4626         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4627     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4628       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4629     if (getLangOpts().EncodeExtendedBlockSig)
4630       getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::OBJC_TQ_None, PType,
4631                                       S, true /*Extended*/);
4632     else
4633       getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S);
4634     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4635     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4636   }
4637 
4638   return S;
4639 }
4640 
4641 bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl(const FunctionDecl *Decl,
4642                                                 std::string& S) {
4643   // Encode result type.
4644   getObjCEncodingForType(Decl->getResultType(), S);
4645   CharUnits ParmOffset;
4646   // Compute size of all parameters.
4647   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4648        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4649     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4650     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4651     if (sz.isZero())
4652       continue;
4653 
4654     assert (sz.isPositive() &&
4655         "getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl - Incomplete param type");
4656     ParmOffset += sz;
4657   }
4658   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4659   ParmOffset = CharUnits::Zero();
4660 
4661   // Argument types.
4662   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4663        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4664     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4665     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4666     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4667           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4668       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4669       // elements.
4670       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4671         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4672     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4673       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4674     getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S);
4675     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4676     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4677   }
4678 
4679   return false;
4680 }
4681 
4682 /// getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter - Return the encoded type for a single
4683 /// method parameter or return type. If Extended, include class names and
4684 /// block object types.
4685 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,
4686                                                    QualType T, std::string& S,
4687                                                    bool Extended) const {
4688   // Encode type qualifer, 'in', 'inout', etc. for the parameter.
4689   getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(QT, S);
4690   // Encode parameter type.
4691   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, 0,
4692                              true     /*OutermostType*/,
4693                              false    /*EncodingProperty*/,
4694                              false    /*StructField*/,
4695                              Extended /*EncodeBlockParameters*/,
4696                              Extended /*EncodeClassNames*/);
4697 }
4698 
4699 /// getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Return the encoded type for this method
4700 /// declaration.
4701 bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl(const ObjCMethodDecl *Decl,
4702                                               std::string& S,
4703                                               bool Extended) const {
4704   // FIXME: This is not very efficient.
4705   // Encode return type.
4706   getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl->getObjCDeclQualifier(),
4707                                     Decl->getResultType(), S, Extended);
4708   // Compute size of all parameters.
4709   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes.
4710   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation!
4711   SourceLocation Loc;
4712   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4713   // The first two arguments (self and _cmd) are pointers; account for
4714   // their size.
4715   CharUnits ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize;
4716   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4717        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4718     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4719     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4720     if (sz.isZero())
4721       continue;
4722 
4723     assert (sz.isPositive() &&
4724         "getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Incomplete param type");
4725     ParmOffset += sz;
4726   }
4727   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4728   S += "@0:";
4729   S += charUnitsToString(PtrSize);
4730 
4731   // Argument types.
4732   ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize;
4733   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4734        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4735     const ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4736     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4737     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4738           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4739       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4740       // elements.
4741       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4742         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4743     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4744       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4745     getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(PVDecl->getObjCDeclQualifier(),
4746                                       PType, S, Extended);
4747     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4748     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4749   }
4750 
4751   return false;
4752 }
4753 
4754 /// getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl - Return the encoded type for this
4755 /// property declaration. If non-NULL, Container must be either an
4756 /// ObjCCategoryImplDecl or ObjCImplementationDecl; it should only be
4757 /// NULL when getting encodings for protocol properties.
4758 /// Property attributes are stored as a comma-delimited C string. The simple
4759 /// attributes readonly and bycopy are encoded as single characters. The
4760 /// parametrized attributes, getter=name, setter=name, and ivar=name, are
4761 /// encoded as single characters, followed by an identifier. Property types
4762 /// are also encoded as a parametrized attribute. The characters used to encode
4763 /// these attributes are defined by the following enumeration:
4764 /// @code
4765 /// enum PropertyAttributes {
4766 /// kPropertyReadOnly = 'R',   // property is read-only.
4767 /// kPropertyBycopy = 'C',     // property is a copy of the value last assigned
4768 /// kPropertyByref = '&',  // property is a reference to the value last assigned
4769 /// kPropertyDynamic = 'D',    // property is dynamic
4770 /// kPropertyGetter = 'G',     // followed by getter selector name
4771 /// kPropertySetter = 'S',     // followed by setter selector name
4772 /// kPropertyInstanceVariable = 'V'  // followed by instance variable  name
4773 /// kPropertyType = 'T'              // followed by old-style type encoding.
4774 /// kPropertyWeak = 'W'              // 'weak' property
4775 /// kPropertyStrong = 'P'            // property GC'able
4776 /// kPropertyNonAtomic = 'N'         // property non-atomic
4777 /// };
4778 /// @endcode
4779 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl(const ObjCPropertyDecl *PD,
4780                                                 const Decl *Container,
4781                                                 std::string& S) const {
4782   // Collect information from the property implementation decl(s).
4783   bool Dynamic = false;
4784   ObjCPropertyImplDecl *SynthesizePID = 0;
4785 
4786   // FIXME: Duplicated code due to poor abstraction.
4787   if (Container) {
4788     if (const ObjCCategoryImplDecl *CID =
4789         dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(Container)) {
4790       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator
4791              i = CID->propimpl_begin(), e = CID->propimpl_end();
4792            i != e; ++i) {
4793         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i;
4794         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) {
4795           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) {
4796             Dynamic = true;
4797           } else {
4798             SynthesizePID = PID;
4799           }
4800         }
4801       }
4802     } else {
4803       const ObjCImplementationDecl *OID=cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(Container);
4804       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator
4805              i = OID->propimpl_begin(), e = OID->propimpl_end();
4806            i != e; ++i) {
4807         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i;
4808         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) {
4809           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) {
4810             Dynamic = true;
4811           } else {
4812             SynthesizePID = PID;
4813           }
4814         }
4815       }
4816     }
4817   }
4818 
4819   // FIXME: This is not very efficient.
4820   S = "T";
4821 
4822   // Encode result type.
4823   // GCC has some special rules regarding encoding of properties which
4824   // closely resembles encoding of ivars.
4825   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PD->getType(), S, true, true, 0,
4826                              true /* outermost type */,
4827                              true /* encoding for property */);
4828 
4829   if (PD->isReadOnly()) {
4830     S += ",R";
4831   } else {
4832     switch (PD->getSetterKind()) {
4833     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Assign: break;
4834     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Copy:   S += ",C"; break;
4835     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Retain: S += ",&"; break;
4836     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Weak:   S += ",W"; break;
4837     }
4838   }
4839 
4840   // It really isn't clear at all what this means, since properties
4841   // are "dynamic by default".
4842   if (Dynamic)
4843     S += ",D";
4844 
4845   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_nonatomic)
4846     S += ",N";
4847 
4848   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_getter) {
4849     S += ",G";
4850     S += PD->getGetterName().getAsString();
4851   }
4852 
4853   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_setter) {
4854     S += ",S";
4855     S += PD->getSetterName().getAsString();
4856   }
4857 
4858   if (SynthesizePID) {
4859     const ObjCIvarDecl *OID = SynthesizePID->getPropertyIvarDecl();
4860     S += ",V";
4861     S += OID->getNameAsString();
4862   }
4863 
4864   // FIXME: OBJCGC: weak & strong
4865 }
4866 
4867 /// getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding -
4868 /// Another legacy compatibility encoding: 32-bit longs are encoded as
4869 /// 'l' or 'L' , but not always.  For typedefs, we need to use
4870 /// 'i' or 'I' instead if encoding a struct field, or a pointer!
4871 ///
4872 void ASTContext::getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding (QualType &PointeeTy) const {
4873   if (isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) {
4874     if (const BuiltinType *BT = PointeeTy->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
4875       if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::ULong && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32)
4876         PointeeTy = UnsignedIntTy;
4877       else
4878         if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Long && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32)
4879           PointeeTy = IntTy;
4880     }
4881   }
4882 }
4883 
4884 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForType(QualType T, std::string& S,
4885                                         const FieldDecl *Field) const {
4886   // We follow the behavior of gcc, expanding structures which are
4887   // directly pointed to, and expanding embedded structures. Note that
4888   // these rules are sufficient to prevent recursive encoding of the
4889   // same type.
4890   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, Field,
4891                              true /* outermost type */);
4892 }
4893 
4894 static char getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(const ASTContext *C,
4895                                             BuiltinType::Kind kind) {
4896     switch (kind) {
4897     case BuiltinType::Void:       return 'v';
4898     case BuiltinType::Bool:       return 'B';
4899     case BuiltinType::Char_U:
4900     case BuiltinType::UChar:      return 'C';
4901     case BuiltinType::Char16:
4902     case BuiltinType::UShort:     return 'S';
4903     case BuiltinType::Char32:
4904     case BuiltinType::UInt:       return 'I';
4905     case BuiltinType::ULong:
4906         return C->getTargetInfo().getLongWidth() == 32 ? 'L' : 'Q';
4907     case BuiltinType::UInt128:    return 'T';
4908     case BuiltinType::ULongLong:  return 'Q';
4909     case BuiltinType::Char_S:
4910     case BuiltinType::SChar:      return 'c';
4911     case BuiltinType::Short:      return 's';
4912     case BuiltinType::WChar_S:
4913     case BuiltinType::WChar_U:
4914     case BuiltinType::Int:        return 'i';
4915     case BuiltinType::Long:
4916       return C->getTargetInfo().getLongWidth() == 32 ? 'l' : 'q';
4917     case BuiltinType::LongLong:   return 'q';
4918     case BuiltinType::Int128:     return 't';
4919     case BuiltinType::Float:      return 'f';
4920     case BuiltinType::Double:     return 'd';
4921     case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return 'D';
4922     case BuiltinType::NullPtr:    return '*'; // like char*
4923 
4924     case BuiltinType::Half:
4925       // FIXME: potentially need @encodes for these!
4926       return ' ';
4927 
4928     case BuiltinType::ObjCId:
4929     case BuiltinType::ObjCClass:
4930     case BuiltinType::ObjCSel:
4931       llvm_unreachable("@encoding ObjC primitive type");
4932 
4933     // OpenCL and placeholder types don't need @encodings.
4934     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1d:
4935     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dArray:
4936     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dBuffer:
4937     case BuiltinType::OCLImage2d:
4938     case BuiltinType::OCLImage2dArray:
4939     case BuiltinType::OCLImage3d:
4940     case BuiltinType::OCLEvent:
4941     case BuiltinType::OCLSampler:
4942     case BuiltinType::Dependent:
4943 #define BUILTIN_TYPE(KIND, ID)
4944 #define PLACEHOLDER_TYPE(KIND, ID) \
4945     case BuiltinType::KIND:
4946 #include "clang/AST/BuiltinTypes.def"
4947       llvm_unreachable("invalid builtin type for @encode");
4948     }
4949     llvm_unreachable("invalid BuiltinType::Kind value");
4950 }
4951 
4952 static char ObjCEncodingForEnumType(const ASTContext *C, const EnumType *ET) {
4953   EnumDecl *Enum = ET->getDecl();
4954 
4955   // The encoding of an non-fixed enum type is always 'i', regardless of size.
4956   if (!Enum->isFixed())
4957     return 'i';
4958 
4959   // The encoding of a fixed enum type matches its fixed underlying type.
4960   const BuiltinType *BT = Enum->getIntegerType()->castAs<BuiltinType>();
4961   return getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(C, BT->getKind());
4962 }
4963 
4964 static void EncodeBitField(const ASTContext *Ctx, std::string& S,
4965                            QualType T, const FieldDecl *FD) {
4966   assert(FD->isBitField() && "not a bitfield - getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl");
4967   S += 'b';
4968   // The NeXT runtime encodes bit fields as b followed by the number of bits.
4969   // The GNU runtime requires more information; bitfields are encoded as b,
4970   // then the offset (in bits) of the first element, then the type of the
4971   // bitfield, then the size in bits.  For example, in this structure:
4972   //
4973   // struct
4974   // {
4975   //    int integer;
4976   //    int flags:2;
4977   // };
4978   // On a 32-bit system, the encoding for flags would be b2 for the NeXT
4979   // runtime, but b32i2 for the GNU runtime.  The reason for this extra
4980   // information is not especially sensible, but we're stuck with it for
4981   // compatibility with GCC, although providing it breaks anything that
4982   // actually uses runtime introspection and wants to work on both runtimes...
4983   if (Ctx->getLangOpts().ObjCRuntime.isGNUFamily()) {
4984     const RecordDecl *RD = FD->getParent();
4985     const ASTRecordLayout &RL = Ctx->getASTRecordLayout(RD);
4986     S += llvm::utostr(RL.getFieldOffset(FD->getFieldIndex()));
4987     if (const EnumType *ET = T->getAs<EnumType>())
4988       S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(Ctx, ET);
4989     else {
4990       const BuiltinType *BT = T->castAs<BuiltinType>();
4991       S += getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(Ctx, BT->getKind());
4992     }
4993   }
4994   S += llvm::utostr(FD->getBitWidthValue(*Ctx));
4995 }
4996 
4997 // FIXME: Use SmallString for accumulating string.
4998 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(QualType T, std::string& S,
4999                                             bool ExpandPointedToStructures,
5000                                             bool ExpandStructures,
5001                                             const FieldDecl *FD,
5002                                             bool OutermostType,
5003                                             bool EncodingProperty,
5004                                             bool StructField,
5005                                             bool EncodeBlockParameters,
5006                                             bool EncodeClassNames,
5007                                             bool EncodePointerToObjCTypedef) const {
5008   CanQualType CT = getCanonicalType(T);
5009   switch (CT->getTypeClass()) {
5010   case Type::Builtin:
5011   case Type::Enum:
5012     if (FD && FD->isBitField())
5013       return EncodeBitField(this, S, T, FD);
5014     if (const BuiltinType *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(CT))
5015       S += getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(this, BT->getKind());
5016     else
5017       S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(this, cast<EnumType>(CT));
5018     return;
5019 
5020   case Type::Complex: {
5021     const ComplexType *CT = T->castAs<ComplexType>();
5022     S += 'j';
5023     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(CT->getElementType(), S, false, false, 0, false,
5024                                false);
5025     return;
5026   }
5027 
5028   case Type::Atomic: {
5029     const AtomicType *AT = T->castAs<AtomicType>();
5030     S += 'A';
5031     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getValueType(), S, false, false, 0,
5032                                false, false);
5033     return;
5034   }
5035 
5036   // encoding for pointer or reference types.
5037   case Type::Pointer:
5038   case Type::LValueReference:
5039   case Type::RValueReference: {
5040     QualType PointeeTy;
5041     if (isa<PointerType>(CT)) {
5042       const PointerType *PT = T->castAs<PointerType>();
5043       if (PT->isObjCSelType()) {
5044         S += ':';
5045         return;
5046       }
5047       PointeeTy = PT->getPointeeType();
5048     } else {
5049       PointeeTy = T->castAs<ReferenceType>()->getPointeeType();
5050     }
5051 
5052     bool isReadOnly = false;
5053     // For historical/compatibility reasons, the read-only qualifier of the
5054     // pointee gets emitted _before_ the '^'.  The read-only qualifier of
5055     // the pointer itself gets ignored, _unless_ we are looking at a typedef!
5056     // Also, do not emit the 'r' for anything but the outermost type!
5057     if (isa<TypedefType>(T.getTypePtr())) {
5058       if (OutermostType && T.isConstQualified()) {
5059         isReadOnly = true;
5060         S += 'r';
5061       }
5062     } else if (OutermostType) {
5063       QualType P = PointeeTy;
5064       while (P->getAs<PointerType>())
5065         P = P->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
5066       if (P.isConstQualified()) {
5067         isReadOnly = true;
5068         S += 'r';
5069       }
5070     }
5071     if (isReadOnly) {
5072       // Another legacy compatibility encoding. Some ObjC qualifier and type
5073       // combinations need to be rearranged.
5074       // Rewrite "in const" from "nr" to "rn"
5075       if (StringRef(S).endswith("nr"))
5076         S.replace(S.end()-2, S.end(), "rn");
5077     }
5078 
5079     if (PointeeTy->isCharType()) {
5080       // char pointer types should be encoded as '*' unless it is a
5081       // type that has been typedef'd to 'BOOL'.
5082       if (!isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(PointeeTy)) {
5083         S += '*';
5084         return;
5085       }
5086     } else if (const RecordType *RTy = PointeeTy->getAs<RecordType>()) {
5087       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_class *" to "#".
5088       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_class")) {
5089         S += '#';
5090         return;
5091       }
5092       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_object *" to "@".
5093       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_object")) {
5094         S += '@';
5095         return;
5096       }
5097       // fall through...
5098     }
5099     S += '^';
5100     getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(PointeeTy);
5101 
5102     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S, false, ExpandPointedToStructures,
5103                                NULL);
5104     return;
5105   }
5106 
5107   case Type::ConstantArray:
5108   case Type::IncompleteArray:
5109   case Type::VariableArray: {
5110     const ArrayType *AT = cast<ArrayType>(CT);
5111 
5112     if (isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT) && !StructField) {
5113       // Incomplete arrays are encoded as a pointer to the array element.
5114       S += '^';
5115 
5116       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S,
5117                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD);
5118     } else {
5119       S += '[';
5120 
5121       if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) {
5122         if (getTypeSize(CAT->getElementType()) == 0)
5123           S += '0';
5124         else
5125           S += llvm::utostr(CAT->getSize().getZExtValue());
5126       } else {
5127         //Variable length arrays are encoded as a regular array with 0 elements.
5128         assert((isa<VariableArrayType>(AT) || isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) &&
5129                "Unknown array type!");
5130         S += '0';
5131       }
5132 
5133       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S,
5134                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD);
5135       S += ']';
5136     }
5137     return;
5138   }
5139 
5140   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
5141   case Type::FunctionProto:
5142     S += '?';
5143     return;
5144 
5145   case Type::Record: {
5146     RecordDecl *RDecl = cast<RecordType>(CT)->getDecl();
5147     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? '(' : '{';
5148     // Anonymous structures print as '?'
5149     if (const IdentifierInfo *II = RDecl->getIdentifier()) {
5150       S += II->getName();
5151       if (ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *Spec
5152           = dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RDecl)) {
5153         const TemplateArgumentList &TemplateArgs = Spec->getTemplateArgs();
5154         llvm::raw_string_ostream OS(S);
5155         TemplateSpecializationType::PrintTemplateArgumentList(OS,
5156                                             TemplateArgs.data(),
5157                                             TemplateArgs.size(),
5158                                             (*this).getPrintingPolicy());
5159       }
5160     } else {
5161       S += '?';
5162     }
5163     if (ExpandStructures) {
5164       S += '=';
5165       if (!RDecl->isUnion()) {
5166         getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RDecl, S, FD);
5167       } else {
5168         for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(),
5169                                      FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end();
5170              Field != FieldEnd; ++Field) {
5171           if (FD) {
5172             S += '"';
5173             S += Field->getNameAsString();
5174             S += '"';
5175           }
5176 
5177           // Special case bit-fields.
5178           if (Field->isBitField()) {
5179             getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true,
5180                                        *Field);
5181           } else {
5182             QualType qt = Field->getType();
5183             getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt);
5184             getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true,
5185                                        FD, /*OutermostType*/false,
5186                                        /*EncodingProperty*/false,
5187                                        /*StructField*/true);
5188           }
5189         }
5190       }
5191     }
5192     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? ')' : '}';
5193     return;
5194   }
5195 
5196   case Type::BlockPointer: {
5197     const BlockPointerType *BT = T->castAs<BlockPointerType>();
5198     S += "@?"; // Unlike a pointer-to-function, which is "^?".
5199     if (EncodeBlockParameters) {
5200       const FunctionType *FT = BT->getPointeeType()->castAs<FunctionType>();
5201 
5202       S += '<';
5203       // Block return type
5204       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(FT->getResultType(), S,
5205                                  ExpandPointedToStructures, ExpandStructures,
5206                                  FD,
5207                                  false /* OutermostType */,
5208                                  EncodingProperty,
5209                                  false /* StructField */,
5210                                  EncodeBlockParameters,
5211                                  EncodeClassNames);
5212       // Block self
5213       S += "@?";
5214       // Block parameters
5215       if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(FT)) {
5216         for (FunctionProtoType::arg_type_iterator I = FPT->arg_type_begin(),
5217                E = FPT->arg_type_end(); I && (I != E); ++I) {
5218           getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(*I, S,
5219                                      ExpandPointedToStructures,
5220                                      ExpandStructures,
5221                                      FD,
5222                                      false /* OutermostType */,
5223                                      EncodingProperty,
5224                                      false /* StructField */,
5225                                      EncodeBlockParameters,
5226                                      EncodeClassNames);
5227         }
5228       }
5229       S += '>';
5230     }
5231     return;
5232   }
5233 
5234   case Type::ObjCObject:
5235   case Type::ObjCInterface: {
5236     // Ignore protocol qualifiers when mangling at this level.
5237     T = T->castAs<ObjCObjectType>()->getBaseType();
5238 
5239     // The assumption seems to be that this assert will succeed
5240     // because nested levels will have filtered out 'id' and 'Class'.
5241     const ObjCInterfaceType *OIT = T->castAs<ObjCInterfaceType>();
5242     // @encode(class_name)
5243     ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = OIT->getDecl();
5244     S += '{';
5245     const IdentifierInfo *II = OI->getIdentifier();
5246     S += II->getName();
5247     S += '=';
5248     SmallVector<const ObjCIvarDecl*, 32> Ivars;
5249     DeepCollectObjCIvars(OI, true, Ivars);
5250     for (unsigned i = 0, e = Ivars.size(); i != e; ++i) {
5251       const FieldDecl *Field = cast<FieldDecl>(Ivars[i]);
5252       if (Field->isBitField())
5253         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, Field);
5254       else
5255         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, FD,
5256                                    false, false, false, false, false,
5257                                    EncodePointerToObjCTypedef);
5258     }
5259     S += '}';
5260     return;
5261   }
5262 
5263   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: {
5264     const ObjCObjectPointerType *OPT = T->castAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
5265     if (OPT->isObjCIdType()) {
5266       S += '@';
5267       return;
5268     }
5269 
5270     if (OPT->isObjCClassType() || OPT->isObjCQualifiedClassType()) {
5271       // FIXME: Consider if we need to output qualifiers for 'Class<p>'.
5272       // Since this is a binary compatibility issue, need to consult with runtime
5273       // folks. Fortunately, this is a *very* obsure construct.
5274       S += '#';
5275       return;
5276     }
5277 
5278     if (OPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
5279       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(getObjCIdType(), S,
5280                                  ExpandPointedToStructures,
5281                                  ExpandStructures, FD);
5282       if (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames) {
5283         // Note that we do extended encoding of protocol qualifer list
5284         // Only when doing ivar or property encoding.
5285         S += '"';
5286         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(),
5287              E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5288           S += '<';
5289           S += (*I)->getNameAsString();
5290           S += '>';
5291         }
5292         S += '"';
5293       }
5294       return;
5295     }
5296 
5297     QualType PointeeTy = OPT->getPointeeType();
5298     if (!EncodingProperty &&
5299         isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr()) &&
5300         !EncodePointerToObjCTypedef) {
5301       // Another historical/compatibility reason.
5302       // We encode the underlying type which comes out as
5303       // {...};
5304       S += '^';
5305       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S,
5306                                  false, ExpandPointedToStructures,
5307                                  NULL,
5308                                  false, false, false, false, false,
5309                                  /*EncodePointerToObjCTypedef*/true);
5310       return;
5311     }
5312 
5313     S += '@';
5314     if (OPT->getInterfaceDecl() &&
5315         (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames)) {
5316       S += '"';
5317       S += OPT->getInterfaceDecl()->getIdentifier()->getName();
5318       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(),
5319            E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5320         S += '<';
5321         S += (*I)->getNameAsString();
5322         S += '>';
5323       }
5324       S += '"';
5325     }
5326     return;
5327   }
5328 
5329   // gcc just blithely ignores member pointers.
5330   // FIXME: we shoul do better than that.  'M' is available.
5331   case Type::MemberPointer:
5332     return;
5333 
5334   case Type::Vector:
5335   case Type::ExtVector:
5336     // This matches gcc's encoding, even though technically it is
5337     // insufficient.
5338     // FIXME. We should do a better job than gcc.
5339     return;
5340 
5341 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(KIND, BASE)
5342 #define TYPE(KIND, BASE)
5343 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(KIND, BASE) \
5344   case Type::KIND:
5345 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(KIND, BASE) \
5346   case Type::KIND:
5347 #define NON_CANONICAL_UNLESS_DEPENDENT_TYPE(KIND, BASE) \
5348   case Type::KIND:
5349 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
5350     llvm_unreachable("@encode for dependent type!");
5351   }
5352   llvm_unreachable("bad type kind!");
5353 }
5354 
5355 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RecordDecl *RDecl,
5356                                                  std::string &S,
5357                                                  const FieldDecl *FD,
5358                                                  bool includeVBases) const {
5359   assert(RDecl && "Expected non-null RecordDecl");
5360   assert(!RDecl->isUnion() && "Should not be called for unions");
5361   if (!RDecl->getDefinition())
5362     return;
5363 
5364   CXXRecordDecl *CXXRec = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RDecl);
5365   std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *> FieldOrBaseOffsets;
5366   const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(RDecl);
5367 
5368   if (CXXRec) {
5369     for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator
5370            BI = CXXRec->bases_begin(),
5371            BE = CXXRec->bases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) {
5372       if (!BI->isVirtual()) {
5373         CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl();
5374         if (base->isEmpty())
5375           continue;
5376         uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getBaseClassOffset(base));
5377         FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5378                                   std::make_pair(offs, base));
5379       }
5380     }
5381   }
5382 
5383   unsigned i = 0;
5384   for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(),
5385                                FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end();
5386        Field != FieldEnd; ++Field, ++i) {
5387     uint64_t offs = layout.getFieldOffset(i);
5388     FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5389                               std::make_pair(offs, *Field));
5390   }
5391 
5392   if (CXXRec && includeVBases) {
5393     for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator
5394            BI = CXXRec->vbases_begin(),
5395            BE = CXXRec->vbases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) {
5396       CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl();
5397       if (base->isEmpty())
5398         continue;
5399       uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getVBaseClassOffset(base));
5400       if (FieldOrBaseOffsets.find(offs) == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end())
5401         FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(),
5402                                   std::make_pair(offs, base));
5403     }
5404   }
5405 
5406   CharUnits size;
5407   if (CXXRec) {
5408     size = includeVBases ? layout.getSize() : layout.getNonVirtualSize();
5409   } else {
5410     size = layout.getSize();
5411   }
5412 
5413   uint64_t CurOffs = 0;
5414   std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *>::iterator
5415     CurLayObj = FieldOrBaseOffsets.begin();
5416 
5417   if (CXXRec && CXXRec->isDynamicClass() &&
5418       (CurLayObj == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end() || CurLayObj->first != 0)) {
5419     if (FD) {
5420       S += "\"_vptr$";
5421       std::string recname = CXXRec->getNameAsString();
5422       if (recname.empty()) recname = "?";
5423       S += recname;
5424       S += '"';
5425     }
5426     S += "^^?";
5427     CurOffs += getTypeSize(VoidPtrTy);
5428   }
5429 
5430   if (!RDecl->hasFlexibleArrayMember()) {
5431     // Mark the end of the structure.
5432     uint64_t offs = toBits(size);
5433     FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5434                               std::make_pair(offs, (NamedDecl*)0));
5435   }
5436 
5437   for (; CurLayObj != FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(); ++CurLayObj) {
5438     assert(CurOffs <= CurLayObj->first);
5439 
5440     if (CurOffs < CurLayObj->first) {
5441       uint64_t padding = CurLayObj->first - CurOffs;
5442       // FIXME: There doesn't seem to be a way to indicate in the encoding that
5443       // packing/alignment of members is different that normal, in which case
5444       // the encoding will be out-of-sync with the real layout.
5445       // If the runtime switches to just consider the size of types without
5446       // taking into account alignment, we could make padding explicit in the
5447       // encoding (e.g. using arrays of chars). The encoding strings would be
5448       // longer then though.
5449       CurOffs += padding;
5450     }
5451 
5452     NamedDecl *dcl = CurLayObj->second;
5453     if (dcl == 0)
5454       break; // reached end of structure.
5455 
5456     if (CXXRecordDecl *base = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(dcl)) {
5457       // We expand the bases without their virtual bases since those are going
5458       // in the initial structure. Note that this differs from gcc which
5459       // expands virtual bases each time one is encountered in the hierarchy,
5460       // making the encoding type bigger than it really is.
5461       getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(base, S, FD, /*includeVBases*/false);
5462       assert(!base->isEmpty());
5463       CurOffs += toBits(getASTRecordLayout(base).getNonVirtualSize());
5464     } else {
5465       FieldDecl *field = cast<FieldDecl>(dcl);
5466       if (FD) {
5467         S += '"';
5468         S += field->getNameAsString();
5469         S += '"';
5470       }
5471 
5472       if (field->isBitField()) {
5473         EncodeBitField(this, S, field->getType(), field);
5474         CurOffs += field->getBitWidthValue(*this);
5475       } else {
5476         QualType qt = field->getType();
5477         getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt);
5478         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true, FD,
5479                                    /*OutermostType*/false,
5480                                    /*EncodingProperty*/false,
5481                                    /*StructField*/true);
5482         CurOffs += getTypeSize(field->getType());
5483       }
5484     }
5485   }
5486 }
5487 
5488 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,
5489                                                  std::string& S) const {
5490   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_In)
5491     S += 'n';
5492   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Inout)
5493     S += 'N';
5494   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Out)
5495     S += 'o';
5496   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Bycopy)
5497     S += 'O';
5498   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Byref)
5499     S += 'R';
5500   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Oneway)
5501     S += 'V';
5502 }
5503 
5504 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCIdDecl() const {
5505   if (!ObjCIdDecl) {
5506     QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, 0, 0);
5507     T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T);
5508     TypeSourceInfo *IdInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
5509     ObjCIdDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5510                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5511                                      SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5512                                      &Idents.get("id"), IdInfo);
5513   }
5514 
5515   return ObjCIdDecl;
5516 }
5517 
5518 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCSelDecl() const {
5519   if (!ObjCSelDecl) {
5520     QualType SelT = getPointerType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy);
5521     TypeSourceInfo *SelInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(SelT);
5522     ObjCSelDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5523                                       getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5524                                       SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5525                                       &Idents.get("SEL"), SelInfo);
5526   }
5527   return ObjCSelDecl;
5528 }
5529 
5530 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCClassDecl() const {
5531   if (!ObjCClassDecl) {
5532     QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, 0, 0);
5533     T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T);
5534     TypeSourceInfo *ClassInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
5535     ObjCClassDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5536                                         getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5537                                         SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5538                                         &Idents.get("Class"), ClassInfo);
5539   }
5540 
5541   return ObjCClassDecl;
5542 }
5543 
5544 ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjCProtocolDecl() const {
5545   if (!ObjCProtocolClassDecl) {
5546     ObjCProtocolClassDecl
5547       = ObjCInterfaceDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5548                                   SourceLocation(),
5549                                   &Idents.get("Protocol"),
5550                                   /*PrevDecl=*/0,
5551                                   SourceLocation(), true);
5552   }
5553 
5554   return ObjCProtocolClassDecl;
5555 }
5556 
5557 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5558 // __builtin_va_list Construction Functions
5559 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5560 
5561 static TypedefDecl *CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5562   // typedef char* __builtin_va_list;
5563   QualType CharPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->CharTy);
5564   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5565     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(CharPtrType);
5566 
5567   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5568     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5569                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5570                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5571                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5572                           TInfo);
5573   return VaListTypeDecl;
5574 }
5575 
5576 static TypedefDecl *CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5577   // typedef void* __builtin_va_list;
5578   QualType VoidPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5579   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5580     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VoidPtrType);
5581 
5582   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5583     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5584                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5585                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5586                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5587                           TInfo);
5588   return VaListTypeDecl;
5589 }
5590 
5591 static TypedefDecl *
5592 CreateAArch64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5593   RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl;
5594   if (Context->getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) {
5595     // namespace std { struct __va_list {
5596     NamespaceDecl *NS;
5597     NS = NamespaceDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5598                                Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5599                                /*Inline*/false, SourceLocation(),
5600                                SourceLocation(), &Context->Idents.get("std"),
5601                                /*PrevDecl*/0);
5602 
5603     VaListTagDecl = CXXRecordDecl::Create(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5604                                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5605                                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5606                                           &Context->Idents.get("__va_list"));
5607     VaListTagDecl->setDeclContext(NS);
5608   } else {
5609     // struct __va_list
5610     VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5611                                    Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5612                                    &Context->Idents.get("__va_list"));
5613   }
5614 
5615   VaListTagDecl->startDefinition();
5616 
5617   const size_t NumFields = 5;
5618   QualType FieldTypes[NumFields];
5619   const char *FieldNames[NumFields];
5620 
5621   // void *__stack;
5622   FieldTypes[0] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5623   FieldNames[0] = "__stack";
5624 
5625   // void *__gr_top;
5626   FieldTypes[1] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5627   FieldNames[1] = "__gr_top";
5628 
5629   // void *__vr_top;
5630   FieldTypes[2] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5631   FieldNames[2] = "__vr_top";
5632 
5633   // int __gr_offs;
5634   FieldTypes[3] = Context->IntTy;
5635   FieldNames[3] = "__gr_offs";
5636 
5637   // int __vr_offs;
5638   FieldTypes[4] = Context->IntTy;
5639   FieldNames[4] = "__vr_offs";
5640 
5641   // Create fields
5642   for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) {
5643     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5644                                          VaListTagDecl,
5645                                          SourceLocation(),
5646                                          SourceLocation(),
5647                                          &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
5648                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
5649                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
5650                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
5651                                          ICIS_NoInit);
5652     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5653     VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field);
5654   }
5655   VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition();
5656   QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl);
5657   Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType;
5658 
5659   // } __builtin_va_list;
5660   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5661     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5662                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5663                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5664                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5665                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType));
5666 
5667   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5668 }
5669 
5670 static TypedefDecl *CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5671   // typedef struct __va_list_tag {
5672   RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl;
5673 
5674   VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5675                                    Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5676                                    &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"));
5677   VaListTagDecl->startDefinition();
5678 
5679   const size_t NumFields = 5;
5680   QualType FieldTypes[NumFields];
5681   const char *FieldNames[NumFields];
5682 
5683   //   unsigned char gpr;
5684   FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedCharTy;
5685   FieldNames[0] = "gpr";
5686 
5687   //   unsigned char fpr;
5688   FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedCharTy;
5689   FieldNames[1] = "fpr";
5690 
5691   //   unsigned short reserved;
5692   FieldTypes[2] = Context->UnsignedShortTy;
5693   FieldNames[2] = "reserved";
5694 
5695   //   void* overflow_arg_area;
5696   FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5697   FieldNames[3] = "overflow_arg_area";
5698 
5699   //   void* reg_save_area;
5700   FieldTypes[4] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5701   FieldNames[4] = "reg_save_area";
5702 
5703   // Create fields
5704   for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) {
5705     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*Context, VaListTagDecl,
5706                                          SourceLocation(),
5707                                          SourceLocation(),
5708                                          &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
5709                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
5710                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
5711                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
5712                                          ICIS_NoInit);
5713     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5714     VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field);
5715   }
5716   VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition();
5717   QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl);
5718   Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType;
5719 
5720   // } __va_list_tag;
5721   TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl
5722     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5723                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5724                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5725                           &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"),
5726                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType));
5727   QualType VaListTagTypedefType =
5728     Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl);
5729 
5730   // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1];
5731   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1);
5732   QualType VaListTagArrayType
5733     = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType,
5734                                     Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0);
5735   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5736     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType);
5737   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5738     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5739                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5740                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5741                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5742                           TInfo);
5743 
5744   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5745 }
5746 
5747 static TypedefDecl *
5748 CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5749   // typedef struct __va_list_tag {
5750   RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl;
5751   VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5752                                    Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5753                                    &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"));
5754   VaListTagDecl->startDefinition();
5755 
5756   const size_t NumFields = 4;
5757   QualType FieldTypes[NumFields];
5758   const char *FieldNames[NumFields];
5759 
5760   //   unsigned gp_offset;
5761   FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedIntTy;
5762   FieldNames[0] = "gp_offset";
5763 
5764   //   unsigned fp_offset;
5765   FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedIntTy;
5766   FieldNames[1] = "fp_offset";
5767 
5768   //   void* overflow_arg_area;
5769   FieldTypes[2] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5770   FieldNames[2] = "overflow_arg_area";
5771 
5772   //   void* reg_save_area;
5773   FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5774   FieldNames[3] = "reg_save_area";
5775 
5776   // Create fields
5777   for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) {
5778     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5779                                          VaListTagDecl,
5780                                          SourceLocation(),
5781                                          SourceLocation(),
5782                                          &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
5783                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
5784                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
5785                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
5786                                          ICIS_NoInit);
5787     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5788     VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field);
5789   }
5790   VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition();
5791   QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl);
5792   Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType;
5793 
5794   // } __va_list_tag;
5795   TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl
5796     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5797                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5798                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5799                           &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"),
5800                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType));
5801   QualType VaListTagTypedefType =
5802     Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl);
5803 
5804   // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1];
5805   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1);
5806   QualType VaListTagArrayType
5807     = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType,
5808                                       Size, ArrayType::Normal,0);
5809   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5810     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType);
5811   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5812     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5813                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5814                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5815                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5816                           TInfo);
5817 
5818   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5819 }
5820 
5821 static TypedefDecl *CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5822   // typedef int __builtin_va_list[4];
5823   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 4);
5824   QualType IntArrayType
5825     = Context->getConstantArrayType(Context->IntTy,
5826 				    Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0);
5827   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5828     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5829                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5830                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5831                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5832                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(IntArrayType));
5833 
5834   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5835 }
5836 
5837 static TypedefDecl *
5838 CreateAAPCSABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5839   RecordDecl *VaListDecl;
5840   if (Context->getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) {
5841     // namespace std { struct __va_list {
5842     NamespaceDecl *NS;
5843     NS = NamespaceDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5844                                Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5845                                /*Inline*/false, SourceLocation(),
5846                                SourceLocation(), &Context->Idents.get("std"),
5847                                /*PrevDecl*/0);
5848 
5849     VaListDecl = CXXRecordDecl::Create(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5850                                        Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5851                                        SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5852                                        &Context->Idents.get("__va_list"));
5853 
5854     VaListDecl->setDeclContext(NS);
5855 
5856   } else {
5857     // struct __va_list {
5858     VaListDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5859                                   Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5860                                   &Context->Idents.get("__va_list"));
5861   }
5862 
5863   VaListDecl->startDefinition();
5864 
5865   // void * __ap;
5866   FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5867                                        VaListDecl,
5868                                        SourceLocation(),
5869                                        SourceLocation(),
5870                                        &Context->Idents.get("__ap"),
5871                                        Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy),
5872                                        /*TInfo=*/0,
5873                                        /*BitWidth=*/0,
5874                                        /*Mutable=*/false,
5875                                        ICIS_NoInit);
5876   Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5877   VaListDecl->addDecl(Field);
5878 
5879   // };
5880   VaListDecl->completeDefinition();
5881 
5882   // typedef struct __va_list __builtin_va_list;
5883   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5884     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(Context->getRecordType(VaListDecl));
5885 
5886   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5887     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5888                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5889                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5890                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5891                           TInfo);
5892 
5893   return VaListTypeDecl;
5894 }
5895 
5896 static TypedefDecl *CreateVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context,
5897                                      TargetInfo::BuiltinVaListKind Kind) {
5898   switch (Kind) {
5899   case TargetInfo::CharPtrBuiltinVaList:
5900     return CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5901   case TargetInfo::VoidPtrBuiltinVaList:
5902     return CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5903   case TargetInfo::AArch64ABIBuiltinVaList:
5904     return CreateAArch64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5905   case TargetInfo::PowerABIBuiltinVaList:
5906     return CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5907   case TargetInfo::X86_64ABIBuiltinVaList:
5908     return CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5909   case TargetInfo::PNaClABIBuiltinVaList:
5910     return CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5911   case TargetInfo::AAPCSABIBuiltinVaList:
5912     return CreateAAPCSABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5913   }
5914 
5915   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled __builtin_va_list type kind");
5916 }
5917 
5918 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getBuiltinVaListDecl() const {
5919   if (!BuiltinVaListDecl)
5920     BuiltinVaListDecl = CreateVaListDecl(this, Target->getBuiltinVaListKind());
5921 
5922   return BuiltinVaListDecl;
5923 }
5924 
5925 QualType ASTContext::getVaListTagType() const {
5926   // Force the creation of VaListTagTy by building the __builtin_va_list
5927   // declaration.
5928   if (VaListTagTy.isNull())
5929     (void) getBuiltinVaListDecl();
5930 
5931   return VaListTagTy;
5932 }
5933 
5934 void ASTContext::setObjCConstantStringInterface(ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl) {
5935   assert(ObjCConstantStringType.isNull() &&
5936          "'NSConstantString' type already set!");
5937 
5938   ObjCConstantStringType = getObjCInterfaceType(Decl);
5939 }
5940 
5941 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that corresponds to a non-empty
5942 /// lookup.
5943 TemplateName
5944 ASTContext::getOverloadedTemplateName(UnresolvedSetIterator Begin,
5945                                       UnresolvedSetIterator End) const {
5946   unsigned size = End - Begin;
5947   assert(size > 1 && "set is not overloaded!");
5948 
5949   void *memory = Allocate(sizeof(OverloadedTemplateStorage) +
5950                           size * sizeof(FunctionTemplateDecl*));
5951   OverloadedTemplateStorage *OT = new(memory) OverloadedTemplateStorage(size);
5952 
5953   NamedDecl **Storage = OT->getStorage();
5954   for (UnresolvedSetIterator I = Begin; I != End; ++I) {
5955     NamedDecl *D = *I;
5956     assert(isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D) ||
5957            (isa<UsingShadowDecl>(D) &&
5958             isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D->getUnderlyingDecl())));
5959     *Storage++ = D;
5960   }
5961 
5962   return TemplateName(OT);
5963 }
5964 
5965 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a qualified
5966 /// template name such as \c std::vector.
5967 TemplateName
5968 ASTContext::getQualifiedTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5969                                      bool TemplateKeyword,
5970                                      TemplateDecl *Template) const {
5971   assert(NNS && "Missing nested-name-specifier in qualified template name");
5972 
5973   // FIXME: Canonicalization?
5974   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5975   QualifiedTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template);
5976 
5977   void *InsertPos = 0;
5978   QualifiedTemplateName *QTN =
5979     QualifiedTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5980   if (!QTN) {
5981     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<QualifiedTemplateName>())
5982         QualifiedTemplateName(NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template);
5983     QualifiedTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5984   }
5985 
5986   return TemplateName(QTN);
5987 }
5988 
5989 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent
5990 /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template apply.
5991 TemplateName
5992 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5993                                      const IdentifierInfo *Name) const {
5994   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
5995          "Nested name specifier must be dependent");
5996 
5997   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5998   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Name);
5999 
6000   void *InsertPos = 0;
6001   DependentTemplateName *QTN =
6002     DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
6003 
6004   if (QTN)
6005     return TemplateName(QTN);
6006 
6007   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
6008   if (CanonNNS == NNS) {
6009     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
6010         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name);
6011   } else {
6012     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Name);
6013     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
6014         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name, Canon);
6015     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN =
6016       DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
6017     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent type name canonicalization broken");
6018     (void)CheckQTN;
6019   }
6020 
6021   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
6022   return TemplateName(QTN);
6023 }
6024 
6025 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent
6026 /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template operator+.
6027 TemplateName
6028 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
6029                                      OverloadedOperatorKind Operator) const {
6030   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
6031          "Nested name specifier must be dependent");
6032 
6033   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
6034   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Operator);
6035 
6036   void *InsertPos = 0;
6037   DependentTemplateName *QTN
6038     = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
6039 
6040   if (QTN)
6041     return TemplateName(QTN);
6042 
6043   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
6044   if (CanonNNS == NNS) {
6045     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
6046         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator);
6047   } else {
6048     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Operator);
6049     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
6050         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator, Canon);
6051 
6052     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN
6053       = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
6054     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent template name canonicalization broken");
6055     (void)CheckQTN;
6056   }
6057 
6058   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
6059   return TemplateName(QTN);
6060 }
6061 
6062 TemplateName
6063 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParm(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *param,
6064                                          TemplateName replacement) const {
6065   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
6066   SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage::Profile(ID, param, replacement);
6067 
6068   void *insertPos = 0;
6069   SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
6070     = SubstTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
6071 
6072   if (!subst) {
6073     subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage(param, replacement);
6074     SubstTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(subst, insertPos);
6075   }
6076 
6077   return TemplateName(subst);
6078 }
6079 
6080 TemplateName
6081 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Param,
6082                                        const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) const {
6083   ASTContext &Self = const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this);
6084   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
6085   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage::Profile(ID, Self, Param, ArgPack);
6086 
6087   void *InsertPos = 0;
6088   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *Subst
6089     = SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
6090 
6091   if (!Subst) {
6092     Subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage(Param,
6093                                                            ArgPack.pack_size(),
6094                                                          ArgPack.pack_begin());
6095     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.InsertNode(Subst, InsertPos);
6096   }
6097 
6098   return TemplateName(Subst);
6099 }
6100 
6101 /// getFromTargetType - Given one of the integer types provided by
6102 /// TargetInfo, produce the corresponding type. The unsigned @p Type
6103 /// is actually a value of type @c TargetInfo::IntType.
6104 CanQualType ASTContext::getFromTargetType(unsigned Type) const {
6105   switch (Type) {
6106   case TargetInfo::NoInt: return CanQualType();
6107   case TargetInfo::SignedShort: return ShortTy;
6108   case TargetInfo::UnsignedShort: return UnsignedShortTy;
6109   case TargetInfo::SignedInt: return IntTy;
6110   case TargetInfo::UnsignedInt: return UnsignedIntTy;
6111   case TargetInfo::SignedLong: return LongTy;
6112   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLong: return UnsignedLongTy;
6113   case TargetInfo::SignedLongLong: return LongLongTy;
6114   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLongLong: return UnsignedLongLongTy;
6115   }
6116 
6117   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled TargetInfo::IntType value");
6118 }
6119 
6120 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6121 //                        Type Predicates.
6122 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6123 
6124 /// getObjCGCAttr - Returns one of GCNone, Weak or Strong objc's
6125 /// garbage collection attribute.
6126 ///
6127 Qualifiers::GC ASTContext::getObjCGCAttrKind(QualType Ty) const {
6128   if (getLangOpts().getGC() == LangOptions::NonGC)
6129     return Qualifiers::GCNone;
6130 
6131   assert(getLangOpts().ObjC1);
6132   Qualifiers::GC GCAttrs = Ty.getObjCGCAttr();
6133 
6134   // Default behaviour under objective-C's gc is for ObjC pointers
6135   // (or pointers to them) be treated as though they were declared
6136   // as __strong.
6137   if (GCAttrs == Qualifiers::GCNone) {
6138     if (Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType() || Ty->isBlockPointerType())
6139       return Qualifiers::Strong;
6140     else if (Ty->isPointerType())
6141       return getObjCGCAttrKind(Ty->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType());
6142   } else {
6143     // It's not valid to set GC attributes on anything that isn't a
6144     // pointer.
6145 #ifndef NDEBUG
6146     QualType CT = Ty->getCanonicalTypeInternal();
6147     while (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(CT))
6148       CT = AT->getElementType();
6149     assert(CT->isAnyPointerType() || CT->isBlockPointerType());
6150 #endif
6151   }
6152   return GCAttrs;
6153 }
6154 
6155 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6156 //                        Type Compatibility Testing
6157 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6158 
6159 /// areCompatVectorTypes - Return true if the two specified vector types are
6160 /// compatible.
6161 static bool areCompatVectorTypes(const VectorType *LHS,
6162                                  const VectorType *RHS) {
6163   assert(LHS->isCanonicalUnqualified() && RHS->isCanonicalUnqualified());
6164   return LHS->getElementType() == RHS->getElementType() &&
6165          LHS->getNumElements() == RHS->getNumElements();
6166 }
6167 
6168 bool ASTContext::areCompatibleVectorTypes(QualType FirstVec,
6169                                           QualType SecondVec) {
6170   assert(FirstVec->isVectorType() && "FirstVec should be a vector type");
6171   assert(SecondVec->isVectorType() && "SecondVec should be a vector type");
6172 
6173   if (hasSameUnqualifiedType(FirstVec, SecondVec))
6174     return true;
6175 
6176   // Treat Neon vector types and most AltiVec vector types as if they are the
6177   // equivalent GCC vector types.
6178   const VectorType *First = FirstVec->getAs<VectorType>();
6179   const VectorType *Second = SecondVec->getAs<VectorType>();
6180   if (First->getNumElements() == Second->getNumElements() &&
6181       hasSameType(First->getElementType(), Second->getElementType()) &&
6182       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel &&
6183       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool &&
6184       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel &&
6185       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool)
6186     return true;
6187 
6188   return false;
6189 }
6190 
6191 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6192 // ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - Compatibility testing for qualified id's.
6193 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6194 
6195 /// ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol - return 'true' if 'lProto' is in the
6196 /// inheritance hierarchy of 'rProto'.
6197 bool
6198 ASTContext::ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(ObjCProtocolDecl *lProto,
6199                                            ObjCProtocolDecl *rProto) const {
6200   if (declaresSameEntity(lProto, rProto))
6201     return true;
6202   for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator PI = rProto->protocol_begin(),
6203        E = rProto->protocol_end(); PI != E; ++PI)
6204     if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lProto, *PI))
6205       return true;
6206   return false;
6207 }
6208 
6209 /// QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId - compare id<pr,...> with id<pr1,...>
6210 /// return true if lhs's protocols conform to rhs's protocol; false
6211 /// otherwise.
6212 bool ASTContext::QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId(QualType lhs, QualType rhs) {
6213   if (lhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType() && rhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType())
6214     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(lhs, rhs, false);
6215   return false;
6216 }
6217 
6218 /// ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible - compare  Class<pr,...> and
6219 /// Class<pr1, ...>.
6220 bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs,
6221                                                       QualType rhs) {
6222   const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6223   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6224   assert ((lhsQID && rhsOPT) && "ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible");
6225 
6226   for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
6227        E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
6228     bool match = false;
6229     ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
6230     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(),
6231          E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
6232       ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
6233       if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto)) {
6234         match = true;
6235         break;
6236       }
6237     }
6238     if (!match)
6239       return false;
6240   }
6241   return true;
6242 }
6243 
6244 /// ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - We know that one of lhs/rhs is an
6245 /// ObjCQualifiedIDType.
6246 bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6247                                                    bool compare) {
6248   // Allow id<P..> and an 'id' or void* type in all cases.
6249   if (lhs->isVoidPointerType() ||
6250       lhs->isObjCIdType() || lhs->isObjCClassType())
6251     return true;
6252   else if (rhs->isVoidPointerType() ||
6253            rhs->isObjCIdType() || rhs->isObjCClassType())
6254     return true;
6255 
6256   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
6257     const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6258 
6259     if (!rhsOPT) return false;
6260 
6261     if (rhsOPT->qual_empty()) {
6262       // If the RHS is a unqualified interface pointer "NSString*",
6263       // make sure we check the class hierarchy.
6264       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
6265         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
6266              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
6267           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
6268           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
6269           // through its super class and categories.
6270           if (!rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true))
6271             return false;
6272         }
6273       }
6274       // If there are no qualifiers and no interface, we have an 'id'.
6275       return true;
6276     }
6277     // Both the right and left sides have qualifiers.
6278     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
6279          E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
6280       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
6281       bool match = false;
6282 
6283       // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
6284       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
6285       // through its super class and categories.
6286       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(),
6287            E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
6288         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
6289         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
6290             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
6291           match = true;
6292           break;
6293         }
6294       }
6295       // If the RHS is a qualified interface pointer "NSString<P>*",
6296       // make sure we check the class hierarchy.
6297       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
6298         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
6299              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
6300           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
6301           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
6302           // through its super class and categories.
6303           if (rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true)) {
6304             match = true;
6305             break;
6306           }
6307         }
6308       }
6309       if (!match)
6310         return false;
6311     }
6312 
6313     return true;
6314   }
6315 
6316   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsQID = rhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType();
6317   assert(rhsQID && "One of the LHS/RHS should be id<x>");
6318 
6319   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsOPT =
6320         lhs->getAsObjCInterfacePointerType()) {
6321     // If both the right and left sides have qualifiers.
6322     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsOPT->qual_begin(),
6323          E = lhsOPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
6324       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
6325       bool match = false;
6326 
6327       // when comparing an id<P> on rhs with a static type on lhs,
6328       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
6329       // through its super class and categories.
6330       // First, lhs protocols in the qualifier list must be found, direct
6331       // or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch.
6332       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(),
6333            E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
6334         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
6335         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
6336             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
6337           match = true;
6338           break;
6339         }
6340       }
6341       if (!match)
6342         return false;
6343     }
6344 
6345     // Static class's protocols, or its super class or category protocols
6346     // must be found, direct or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch.
6347     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *lhsID = lhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
6348       llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols;
6349       CollectInheritedProtocols(lhsID, LHSInheritedProtocols);
6350       // This is rather dubious but matches gcc's behavior. If lhs has
6351       // no type qualifier and its class has no static protocol(s)
6352       // assume that it is mismatch.
6353       if (LHSInheritedProtocols.empty() && lhsOPT->qual_empty())
6354         return false;
6355       for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
6356            LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6357            E = LHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) {
6358         bool match = false;
6359         ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = (*I);
6360         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(),
6361              E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
6362           ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
6363           if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
6364               (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
6365             match = true;
6366             break;
6367           }
6368         }
6369         if (!match)
6370           return false;
6371       }
6372     }
6373     return true;
6374   }
6375   return false;
6376 }
6377 
6378 /// canAssignObjCInterfaces - Return true if the two interface types are
6379 /// compatible for assignment from RHS to LHS.  This handles validation of any
6380 /// protocol qualifiers on the LHS or RHS.
6381 ///
6382 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
6383                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT) {
6384   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType();
6385   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType();
6386 
6387   // If either type represents the built-in 'id' or 'Class' types, return true.
6388   if (LHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass() ||
6389       RHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass())
6390     return true;
6391 
6392   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedId() || RHS->isObjCQualifiedId())
6393     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
6394                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0),
6395                                              false);
6396 
6397   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedClass() && RHS->isObjCQualifiedClass())
6398     return ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
6399                                                 QualType(RHSOPT,0));
6400 
6401   // If we have 2 user-defined types, fall into that path.
6402   if (LHS->getInterface() && RHS->getInterface())
6403     return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS);
6404 
6405   return false;
6406 }
6407 
6408 /// canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer - This routine is specifically written
6409 /// for providing type-safety for objective-c pointers used to pass/return
6410 /// arguments in block literals. When passed as arguments, passing 'A*' where
6411 /// 'id' is expected is not OK. Passing 'Sub *" where 'Super *" is expected is
6412 /// not OK. For the return type, the opposite is not OK.
6413 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer(
6414                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
6415                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT,
6416                                          bool BlockReturnType) {
6417   if (RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || LHSOPT->isObjCIdType())
6418     return true;
6419 
6420   if (LHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType()) {
6421     return RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType();
6422   }
6423 
6424   if (LHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType())
6425     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
6426                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0),
6427                                              false);
6428 
6429   const ObjCInterfaceType* LHS = LHSOPT->getInterfaceType();
6430   const ObjCInterfaceType* RHS = RHSOPT->getInterfaceType();
6431   if (LHS && RHS)  { // We have 2 user-defined types.
6432     if (LHS != RHS) {
6433       if (LHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getDecl()))
6434         return BlockReturnType;
6435       if (RHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(LHS->getDecl()))
6436         return !BlockReturnType;
6437     }
6438     else
6439       return true;
6440   }
6441   return false;
6442 }
6443 
6444 /// getIntersectionOfProtocols - This routine finds the intersection of set
6445 /// of protocols inherited from two distinct objective-c pointer objects.
6446 /// It is used to build composite qualifier list of the composite type of
6447 /// the conditional expression involving two objective-c pointer objects.
6448 static
6449 void getIntersectionOfProtocols(ASTContext &Context,
6450                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
6451                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT,
6452       SmallVectorImpl<ObjCProtocolDecl *> &IntersectionOfProtocols) {
6453 
6454   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType();
6455   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType();
6456   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS must have an interface base");
6457   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS must have an interface base");
6458 
6459   llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> InheritedProtocolSet;
6460   unsigned LHSNumProtocols = LHS->getNumProtocols();
6461   if (LHSNumProtocols > 0)
6462     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHS->qual_begin(), LHS->qual_end());
6463   else {
6464     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols;
6465     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(LHS->getInterface(),
6466                                       LHSInheritedProtocols);
6467     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6468                                 LHSInheritedProtocols.end());
6469   }
6470 
6471   unsigned RHSNumProtocols = RHS->getNumProtocols();
6472   if (RHSNumProtocols > 0) {
6473     ObjCProtocolDecl **RHSProtocols =
6474       const_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl **>(RHS->qual_begin());
6475     for (unsigned i = 0; i < RHSNumProtocols; ++i)
6476       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count(RHSProtocols[i]))
6477         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back(RHSProtocols[i]);
6478   } else {
6479     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> RHSInheritedProtocols;
6480     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(),
6481                                       RHSInheritedProtocols);
6482     for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
6483          RHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6484          E = RHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I)
6485       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count((*I)))
6486         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back((*I));
6487   }
6488 }
6489 
6490 /// areCommonBaseCompatible - Returns common base class of the two classes if
6491 /// one found. Note that this is O'2 algorithm. But it will be called as the
6492 /// last type comparison in a ?-exp of ObjC pointer types before a
6493 /// warning is issued. So, its invokation is extremely rare.
6494 QualType ASTContext::areCommonBaseCompatible(
6495                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Lptr,
6496                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Rptr) {
6497   const ObjCObjectType *LHS = Lptr->getObjectType();
6498   const ObjCObjectType *RHS = Rptr->getObjectType();
6499   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* LDecl = LHS->getInterface();
6500   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* RDecl = RHS->getInterface();
6501   if (!LDecl || !RDecl || (declaresSameEntity(LDecl, RDecl)))
6502     return QualType();
6503 
6504   do {
6505     LHS = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(getObjCInterfaceType(LDecl));
6506     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS)) {
6507       SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> Protocols;
6508       getIntersectionOfProtocols(*this, Lptr, Rptr, Protocols);
6509 
6510       QualType Result = QualType(LHS, 0);
6511       if (!Protocols.empty())
6512         Result = getObjCObjectType(Result, Protocols.data(), Protocols.size());
6513       Result = getObjCObjectPointerType(Result);
6514       return Result;
6515     }
6516   } while ((LDecl = LDecl->getSuperClass()));
6517 
6518   return QualType();
6519 }
6520 
6521 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectType *LHS,
6522                                          const ObjCObjectType *RHS) {
6523   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS is not an interface type");
6524   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS is not an interface type");
6525 
6526   // Verify that the base decls are compatible: the RHS must be a subclass of
6527   // the LHS.
6528   if (!LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface()))
6529     return false;
6530 
6531   // RHS must have a superset of the protocols in the LHS.  If the LHS is not
6532   // protocol qualified at all, then we are good.
6533   if (LHS->getNumProtocols() == 0)
6534     return true;
6535 
6536   // Okay, we know the LHS has protocol qualifiers.  If the RHS doesn't,
6537   // more detailed analysis is required.
6538   if (RHS->getNumProtocols() == 0) {
6539     // OK, if LHS is a superclass of RHS *and*
6540     // this superclass is assignment compatible with LHS.
6541     // false otherwise.
6542     bool IsSuperClass =
6543       LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface());
6544     if (IsSuperClass) {
6545       // OK if conversion of LHS to SuperClass results in narrowing of types
6546       // ; i.e., SuperClass may implement at least one of the protocols
6547       // in LHS's protocol list. Example, SuperObj<P1> = lhs<P1,P2> is ok.
6548       // But not SuperObj<P1,P2,P3> = lhs<P1,P2>.
6549       llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> SuperClassInheritedProtocols;
6550       CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(), SuperClassInheritedProtocols);
6551       // If super class has no protocols, it is not a match.
6552       if (SuperClassInheritedProtocols.empty())
6553         return false;
6554 
6555       for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(),
6556            LHSPE = LHS->qual_end();
6557            LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) {
6558         bool SuperImplementsProtocol = false;
6559         ObjCProtocolDecl *LHSProto = (*LHSPI);
6560 
6561         for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
6562              SuperClassInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6563              E = SuperClassInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) {
6564           ObjCProtocolDecl *SuperClassProto = (*I);
6565           if (SuperClassProto->lookupProtocolNamed(LHSProto->getIdentifier())) {
6566             SuperImplementsProtocol = true;
6567             break;
6568           }
6569         }
6570         if (!SuperImplementsProtocol)
6571           return false;
6572       }
6573       return true;
6574     }
6575     return false;
6576   }
6577 
6578   for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(),
6579                                      LHSPE = LHS->qual_end();
6580        LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) {
6581     bool RHSImplementsProtocol = false;
6582 
6583     // If the RHS doesn't implement the protocol on the left, the types
6584     // are incompatible.
6585     for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator RHSPI = RHS->qual_begin(),
6586                                        RHSPE = RHS->qual_end();
6587          RHSPI != RHSPE; RHSPI++) {
6588       if ((*RHSPI)->lookupProtocolNamed((*LHSPI)->getIdentifier())) {
6589         RHSImplementsProtocol = true;
6590         break;
6591       }
6592     }
6593     // FIXME: For better diagnostics, consider passing back the protocol name.
6594     if (!RHSImplementsProtocol)
6595       return false;
6596   }
6597   // The RHS implements all protocols listed on the LHS.
6598   return true;
6599 }
6600 
6601 bool ASTContext::areComparableObjCPointerTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6602   // get the "pointed to" types
6603   const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6604   const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6605 
6606   if (!LHSOPT || !RHSOPT)
6607     return false;
6608 
6609   return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSOPT, RHSOPT) ||
6610          canAssignObjCInterfaces(RHSOPT, LHSOPT);
6611 }
6612 
6613 bool ASTContext::canBindObjCObjectType(QualType To, QualType From) {
6614   return canAssignObjCInterfaces(
6615                 getObjCObjectPointerType(To)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6616                 getObjCObjectPointerType(From)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>());
6617 }
6618 
6619 /// typesAreCompatible - C99 6.7.3p9: For two qualified types to be compatible,
6620 /// both shall have the identically qualified version of a compatible type.
6621 /// C99 6.2.7p1: Two types have compatible types if their types are the
6622 /// same. See 6.7.[2,3,5] for additional rules.
6623 bool ASTContext::typesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,
6624                                     bool CompareUnqualified) {
6625   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
6626     return hasSameType(LHS, RHS);
6627 
6628   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, false, CompareUnqualified).isNull();
6629 }
6630 
6631 bool ASTContext::propertyTypesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6632   return typesAreCompatible(LHS, RHS);
6633 }
6634 
6635 bool ASTContext::typesAreBlockPointerCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6636   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true).isNull();
6637 }
6638 
6639 /// mergeTransparentUnionType - if T is a transparent union type and a member
6640 /// of T is compatible with SubType, return the merged type, else return
6641 /// QualType()
6642 QualType ASTContext::mergeTransparentUnionType(QualType T, QualType SubType,
6643                                                bool OfBlockPointer,
6644                                                bool Unqualified) {
6645   if (const RecordType *UT = T->getAsUnionType()) {
6646     RecordDecl *UD = UT->getDecl();
6647     if (UD->hasAttr<TransparentUnionAttr>()) {
6648       for (RecordDecl::field_iterator it = UD->field_begin(),
6649            itend = UD->field_end(); it != itend; ++it) {
6650         QualType ET = it->getType().getUnqualifiedType();
6651         QualType MT = mergeTypes(ET, SubType, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6652         if (!MT.isNull())
6653           return MT;
6654       }
6655     }
6656   }
6657 
6658   return QualType();
6659 }
6660 
6661 /// mergeFunctionArgumentTypes - merge two types which appear as function
6662 /// argument types
6663 QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6664                                                 bool OfBlockPointer,
6665                                                 bool Unqualified) {
6666   // GNU extension: two types are compatible if they appear as a function
6667   // argument, one of the types is a transparent union type and the other
6668   // type is compatible with a union member
6669   QualType lmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer,
6670                                               Unqualified);
6671   if (!lmerge.isNull())
6672     return lmerge;
6673 
6674   QualType rmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(rhs, lhs, OfBlockPointer,
6675                                               Unqualified);
6676   if (!rmerge.isNull())
6677     return rmerge;
6678 
6679   return mergeTypes(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6680 }
6681 
6682 QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6683                                         bool OfBlockPointer,
6684                                         bool Unqualified) {
6685   const FunctionType *lbase = lhs->getAs<FunctionType>();
6686   const FunctionType *rbase = rhs->getAs<FunctionType>();
6687   const FunctionProtoType *lproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(lbase);
6688   const FunctionProtoType *rproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(rbase);
6689   bool allLTypes = true;
6690   bool allRTypes = true;
6691 
6692   // Check return type
6693   QualType retType;
6694   if (OfBlockPointer) {
6695     QualType RHS = rbase->getResultType();
6696     QualType LHS = lbase->getResultType();
6697     bool UnqualifiedResult = Unqualified;
6698     if (!UnqualifiedResult)
6699       UnqualifiedResult = (!RHS.hasQualifiers() && LHS.hasQualifiers());
6700     retType = mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true, UnqualifiedResult, true);
6701   }
6702   else
6703     retType = mergeTypes(lbase->getResultType(), rbase->getResultType(), false,
6704                          Unqualified);
6705   if (retType.isNull()) return QualType();
6706 
6707   if (Unqualified)
6708     retType = retType.getUnqualifiedType();
6709 
6710   CanQualType LRetType = getCanonicalType(lbase->getResultType());
6711   CanQualType RRetType = getCanonicalType(rbase->getResultType());
6712   if (Unqualified) {
6713     LRetType = LRetType.getUnqualifiedType();
6714     RRetType = RRetType.getUnqualifiedType();
6715   }
6716 
6717   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != LRetType)
6718     allLTypes = false;
6719   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != RRetType)
6720     allRTypes = false;
6721 
6722   // FIXME: double check this
6723   // FIXME: should we error if lbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 &&
6724   //                           rbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 &&
6725   //                           lbase->getRegParmAttr() != rbase->getRegParmAttr()?
6726   FunctionType::ExtInfo lbaseInfo = lbase->getExtInfo();
6727   FunctionType::ExtInfo rbaseInfo = rbase->getExtInfo();
6728 
6729   // Compatible functions must have compatible calling conventions
6730   if (!isSameCallConv(lbaseInfo.getCC(), rbaseInfo.getCC()))
6731     return QualType();
6732 
6733   // Regparm is part of the calling convention.
6734   if (lbaseInfo.getHasRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getHasRegParm())
6735     return QualType();
6736   if (lbaseInfo.getRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getRegParm())
6737     return QualType();
6738 
6739   if (lbaseInfo.getProducesResult() != rbaseInfo.getProducesResult())
6740     return QualType();
6741 
6742   // FIXME: some uses, e.g. conditional exprs, really want this to be 'both'.
6743   bool NoReturn = lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() || rbaseInfo.getNoReturn();
6744 
6745   if (lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() != NoReturn)
6746     allLTypes = false;
6747   if (rbaseInfo.getNoReturn() != NoReturn)
6748     allRTypes = false;
6749 
6750   FunctionType::ExtInfo einfo = lbaseInfo.withNoReturn(NoReturn);
6751 
6752   if (lproto && rproto) { // two C99 style function prototypes
6753     assert(!lproto->hasExceptionSpec() && !rproto->hasExceptionSpec() &&
6754            "C++ shouldn't be here");
6755     unsigned lproto_nargs = lproto->getNumArgs();
6756     unsigned rproto_nargs = rproto->getNumArgs();
6757 
6758     // Compatible functions must have the same number of arguments
6759     if (lproto_nargs != rproto_nargs)
6760       return QualType();
6761 
6762     // Variadic and non-variadic functions aren't compatible
6763     if (lproto->isVariadic() != rproto->isVariadic())
6764       return QualType();
6765 
6766     if (lproto->getTypeQuals() != rproto->getTypeQuals())
6767       return QualType();
6768 
6769     if (LangOpts.ObjCAutoRefCount &&
6770         !FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(rproto, lproto))
6771       return QualType();
6772 
6773     // Check argument compatibility
6774     SmallVector<QualType, 10> types;
6775     for (unsigned i = 0; i < lproto_nargs; i++) {
6776       QualType largtype = lproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType();
6777       QualType rargtype = rproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType();
6778       QualType argtype = mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(largtype, rargtype,
6779                                                     OfBlockPointer,
6780                                                     Unqualified);
6781       if (argtype.isNull()) return QualType();
6782 
6783       if (Unqualified)
6784         argtype = argtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6785 
6786       types.push_back(argtype);
6787       if (Unqualified) {
6788         largtype = largtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6789         rargtype = rargtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6790       }
6791 
6792       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(largtype))
6793         allLTypes = false;
6794       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(rargtype))
6795         allRTypes = false;
6796     }
6797 
6798     if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6799     if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6800 
6801     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = lproto->getExtProtoInfo();
6802     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo;
6803     return getFunctionType(retType, types, EPI);
6804   }
6805 
6806   if (lproto) allRTypes = false;
6807   if (rproto) allLTypes = false;
6808 
6809   const FunctionProtoType *proto = lproto ? lproto : rproto;
6810   if (proto) {
6811     assert(!proto->hasExceptionSpec() && "C++ shouldn't be here");
6812     if (proto->isVariadic()) return QualType();
6813     // Check that the types are compatible with the types that
6814     // would result from default argument promotions (C99 6.7.5.3p15).
6815     // The only types actually affected are promotable integer
6816     // types and floats, which would be passed as a different
6817     // type depending on whether the prototype is visible.
6818     unsigned proto_nargs = proto->getNumArgs();
6819     for (unsigned i = 0; i < proto_nargs; ++i) {
6820       QualType argTy = proto->getArgType(i);
6821 
6822       // Look at the converted type of enum types, since that is the type used
6823       // to pass enum values.
6824       if (const EnumType *Enum = argTy->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6825         argTy = Enum->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6826         if (argTy.isNull())
6827           return QualType();
6828       }
6829 
6830       if (argTy->isPromotableIntegerType() ||
6831           getCanonicalType(argTy).getUnqualifiedType() == FloatTy)
6832         return QualType();
6833     }
6834 
6835     if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6836     if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6837 
6838     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = proto->getExtProtoInfo();
6839     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo;
6840     return getFunctionType(retType,
6841                            ArrayRef<QualType>(proto->arg_type_begin(),
6842                                               proto->getNumArgs()),
6843                            EPI);
6844   }
6845 
6846   if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6847   if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6848   return getFunctionNoProtoType(retType, einfo);
6849 }
6850 
6851 /// Given that we have an enum type and a non-enum type, try to merge them.
6852 static QualType mergeEnumWithInteger(ASTContext &Context, const EnumType *ET,
6853                                      QualType other, bool isBlockReturnType) {
6854   // C99 6.7.2.2p4: Each enumerated type shall be compatible with char,
6855   // a signed integer type, or an unsigned integer type.
6856   // Compatibility is based on the underlying type, not the promotion
6857   // type.
6858   QualType underlyingType = ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6859   if (underlyingType.isNull()) return QualType();
6860   if (Context.hasSameType(underlyingType, other))
6861     return other;
6862 
6863   // In block return types, we're more permissive and accept any
6864   // integral type of the same size.
6865   if (isBlockReturnType && other->isIntegerType() &&
6866       Context.getTypeSize(underlyingType) == Context.getTypeSize(other))
6867     return other;
6868 
6869   return QualType();
6870 }
6871 
6872 QualType ASTContext::mergeTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,
6873                                 bool OfBlockPointer,
6874                                 bool Unqualified, bool BlockReturnType) {
6875   // C++ [expr]: If an expression initially has the type "reference to T", the
6876   // type is adjusted to "T" prior to any further analysis, the expression
6877   // designates the object or function denoted by the reference, and the
6878   // expression is an lvalue unless the reference is an rvalue reference and
6879   // the expression is a function call (possibly inside parentheses).
6880   assert(!LHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "LHS is a reference type?");
6881   assert(!RHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "RHS is a reference type?");
6882 
6883   if (Unqualified) {
6884     LHS = LHS.getUnqualifiedType();
6885     RHS = RHS.getUnqualifiedType();
6886   }
6887 
6888   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS),
6889            RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS);
6890 
6891   // If two types are identical, they are compatible.
6892   if (LHSCan == RHSCan)
6893     return LHS;
6894 
6895   // If the qualifiers are different, the types aren't compatible... mostly.
6896   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6897   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6898   if (LQuals != RQuals) {
6899     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type
6900     // mismatch.
6901     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() ||
6902         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace() ||
6903         LQuals.getObjCLifetime() != RQuals.getObjCLifetime())
6904       return QualType();
6905 
6906     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is
6907     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective
6908     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix
6909     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually
6910     // qualified __strong.
6911     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6912     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6913     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements");
6914 
6915     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak)
6916       return QualType();
6917 
6918     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6919       return mergeTypes(LHS, getObjCGCQualType(RHS, Qualifiers::Strong));
6920     }
6921     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong && LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6922       return mergeTypes(getObjCGCQualType(LHS, Qualifiers::Strong), RHS);
6923     }
6924     return QualType();
6925   }
6926 
6927   // Okay, qualifiers are equal.
6928 
6929   Type::TypeClass LHSClass = LHSCan->getTypeClass();
6930   Type::TypeClass RHSClass = RHSCan->getTypeClass();
6931 
6932   // We want to consider the two function types to be the same for these
6933   // comparisons, just force one to the other.
6934   if (LHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) LHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto;
6935   if (RHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) RHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto;
6936 
6937   // Same as above for arrays
6938   if (LHSClass == Type::VariableArray || LHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray)
6939     LHSClass = Type::ConstantArray;
6940   if (RHSClass == Type::VariableArray || RHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray)
6941     RHSClass = Type::ConstantArray;
6942 
6943   // ObjCInterfaces are just specialized ObjCObjects.
6944   if (LHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) LHSClass = Type::ObjCObject;
6945   if (RHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) RHSClass = Type::ObjCObject;
6946 
6947   // Canonicalize ExtVector -> Vector.
6948   if (LHSClass == Type::ExtVector) LHSClass = Type::Vector;
6949   if (RHSClass == Type::ExtVector) RHSClass = Type::Vector;
6950 
6951   // If the canonical type classes don't match.
6952   if (LHSClass != RHSClass) {
6953     // Note that we only have special rules for turning block enum
6954     // returns into block int returns, not vice-versa.
6955     if (const EnumType* ETy = LHS->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6956       return mergeEnumWithInteger(*this, ETy, RHS, false);
6957     }
6958     if (const EnumType* ETy = RHS->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6959       return mergeEnumWithInteger(*this, ETy, LHS, BlockReturnType);
6960     }
6961     // allow block pointer type to match an 'id' type.
6962     if (OfBlockPointer && !BlockReturnType) {
6963        if (LHS->isObjCIdType() && RHS->isBlockPointerType())
6964          return LHS;
6965       if (RHS->isObjCIdType() && LHS->isBlockPointerType())
6966         return RHS;
6967     }
6968 
6969     return QualType();
6970   }
6971 
6972   // The canonical type classes match.
6973   switch (LHSClass) {
6974 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
6975 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
6976 #define NON_CANONICAL_UNLESS_DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6977 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6978 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6979 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
6980     llvm_unreachable("Non-canonical and dependent types shouldn't get here");
6981 
6982   case Type::LValueReference:
6983   case Type::RValueReference:
6984   case Type::MemberPointer:
6985     llvm_unreachable("C++ should never be in mergeTypes");
6986 
6987   case Type::ObjCInterface:
6988   case Type::IncompleteArray:
6989   case Type::VariableArray:
6990   case Type::FunctionProto:
6991   case Type::ExtVector:
6992     llvm_unreachable("Types are eliminated above");
6993 
6994   case Type::Pointer:
6995   {
6996     // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6997     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6998     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6999     if (Unqualified) {
7000       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
7001       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
7002     }
7003     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, false,
7004                                      Unqualified);
7005     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
7006     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
7007       return LHS;
7008     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
7009       return RHS;
7010     return getPointerType(ResultType);
7011   }
7012   case Type::BlockPointer:
7013   {
7014     // Merge two block pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
7015     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
7016     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
7017     if (Unqualified) {
7018       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
7019       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
7020     }
7021     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, OfBlockPointer,
7022                                      Unqualified);
7023     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
7024     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
7025       return LHS;
7026     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
7027       return RHS;
7028     return getBlockPointerType(ResultType);
7029   }
7030   case Type::Atomic:
7031   {
7032     // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
7033     QualType LHSValue = LHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType();
7034     QualType RHSValue = RHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType();
7035     if (Unqualified) {
7036       LHSValue = LHSValue.getUnqualifiedType();
7037       RHSValue = RHSValue.getUnqualifiedType();
7038     }
7039     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSValue, RHSValue, false,
7040                                      Unqualified);
7041     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
7042     if (getCanonicalType(LHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
7043       return LHS;
7044     if (getCanonicalType(RHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
7045       return RHS;
7046     return getAtomicType(ResultType);
7047   }
7048   case Type::ConstantArray:
7049   {
7050     const ConstantArrayType* LCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(LHS);
7051     const ConstantArrayType* RCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(RHS);
7052     if (LCAT && RCAT && RCAT->getSize() != LCAT->getSize())
7053       return QualType();
7054 
7055     QualType LHSElem = getAsArrayType(LHS)->getElementType();
7056     QualType RHSElem = getAsArrayType(RHS)->getElementType();
7057     if (Unqualified) {
7058       LHSElem = LHSElem.getUnqualifiedType();
7059       RHSElem = RHSElem.getUnqualifiedType();
7060     }
7061 
7062     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSElem, RHSElem, false, Unqualified);
7063     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
7064     if (LCAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
7065       return LHS;
7066     if (RCAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
7067       return RHS;
7068     if (LCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, LCAT->getSize(),
7069                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
7070     if (RCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, RCAT->getSize(),
7071                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
7072     const VariableArrayType* LVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(LHS);
7073     const VariableArrayType* RVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(RHS);
7074     if (LVAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
7075       return LHS;
7076     if (RVAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
7077       return RHS;
7078     if (LVAT) {
7079       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because
7080       // the array's size has to be the size of LHS, but the type
7081       // has to be different.
7082       return LHS;
7083     }
7084     if (RVAT) {
7085       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because
7086       // the array's size has to be the size of RHS, but the type
7087       // has to be different.
7088       return RHS;
7089     }
7090     if (getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return LHS;
7091     if (getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return RHS;
7092     return getIncompleteArrayType(ResultType,
7093                                   ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
7094   }
7095   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
7096     return mergeFunctionTypes(LHS, RHS, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
7097   case Type::Record:
7098   case Type::Enum:
7099     return QualType();
7100   case Type::Builtin:
7101     // Only exactly equal builtin types are compatible, which is tested above.
7102     return QualType();
7103   case Type::Complex:
7104     // Distinct complex types are incompatible.
7105     return QualType();
7106   case Type::Vector:
7107     // FIXME: The merged type should be an ExtVector!
7108     if (areCompatVectorTypes(LHSCan->getAs<VectorType>(),
7109                              RHSCan->getAs<VectorType>()))
7110       return LHS;
7111     return QualType();
7112   case Type::ObjCObject: {
7113     // Check if the types are assignment compatible.
7114     // FIXME: This should be type compatibility, e.g. whether
7115     // "LHS x; RHS x;" at global scope is legal.
7116     const ObjCObjectType* LHSIface = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>();
7117     const ObjCObjectType* RHSIface = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>();
7118     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSIface, RHSIface))
7119       return LHS;
7120 
7121     return QualType();
7122   }
7123   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: {
7124     if (OfBlockPointer) {
7125       if (canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer(
7126                                           LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
7127                                           RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
7128                                           BlockReturnType))
7129         return LHS;
7130       return QualType();
7131     }
7132     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
7133                                 RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()))
7134       return LHS;
7135 
7136     return QualType();
7137   }
7138   }
7139 
7140   llvm_unreachable("Invalid Type::Class!");
7141 }
7142 
7143 bool ASTContext::FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(
7144                    const FunctionProtoType *FromFunctionType,
7145                    const FunctionProtoType *ToFunctionType) {
7146   if (FromFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs() !=
7147       ToFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs())
7148     return false;
7149   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo FromEPI =
7150     FromFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo();
7151   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo ToEPI =
7152     ToFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo();
7153   if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments && ToEPI.ConsumedArguments)
7154     for (unsigned ArgIdx = 0, NumArgs = FromFunctionType->getNumArgs();
7155          ArgIdx != NumArgs; ++ArgIdx)  {
7156       if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx] !=
7157           ToEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx])
7158         return false;
7159     }
7160   return true;
7161 }
7162 
7163 /// mergeObjCGCQualifiers - This routine merges ObjC's GC attribute of 'LHS' and
7164 /// 'RHS' attributes and returns the merged version; including for function
7165 /// return types.
7166 QualType ASTContext::mergeObjCGCQualifiers(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
7167   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS),
7168   RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS);
7169   // If two types are identical, they are compatible.
7170   if (LHSCan == RHSCan)
7171     return LHS;
7172   if (RHSCan->isFunctionType()) {
7173     if (!LHSCan->isFunctionType())
7174       return QualType();
7175     QualType OldReturnType =
7176       cast<FunctionType>(RHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType();
7177     QualType NewReturnType =
7178       cast<FunctionType>(LHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType();
7179     QualType ResReturnType =
7180       mergeObjCGCQualifiers(NewReturnType, OldReturnType);
7181     if (ResReturnType.isNull())
7182       return QualType();
7183     if (ResReturnType == NewReturnType || ResReturnType == OldReturnType) {
7184       // id foo(); ... __strong id foo(); or: __strong id foo(); ... id foo();
7185       // In either case, use OldReturnType to build the new function type.
7186       const FunctionType *F = LHS->getAs<FunctionType>();
7187       if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(F)) {
7188         FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo();
7189         EPI.ExtInfo = getFunctionExtInfo(LHS);
7190         QualType ResultType
7191           = getFunctionType(OldReturnType,
7192                             ArrayRef<QualType>(FPT->arg_type_begin(),
7193                                                FPT->getNumArgs()),
7194                             EPI);
7195         return ResultType;
7196       }
7197     }
7198     return QualType();
7199   }
7200 
7201   // If the qualifiers are different, the types can still be merged.
7202   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
7203   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
7204   if (LQuals != RQuals) {
7205     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type mismatch.
7206     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() ||
7207         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace())
7208       return QualType();
7209 
7210     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is
7211     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective
7212     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix
7213     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually
7214     // qualified __strong.
7215     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
7216     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
7217     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements");
7218 
7219     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak)
7220       return QualType();
7221 
7222     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong)
7223       return LHS;
7224     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong)
7225       return RHS;
7226     return QualType();
7227   }
7228 
7229   if (LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType() && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
7230     QualType LHSBaseQT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
7231     QualType RHSBaseQT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
7232     QualType ResQT = mergeObjCGCQualifiers(LHSBaseQT, RHSBaseQT);
7233     if (ResQT == LHSBaseQT)
7234       return LHS;
7235     if (ResQT == RHSBaseQT)
7236       return RHS;
7237   }
7238   return QualType();
7239 }
7240 
7241 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
7242 //                         Integer Predicates
7243 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
7244 
7245 unsigned ASTContext::getIntWidth(QualType T) const {
7246   if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(T))
7247     T = ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
7248   if (T->isBooleanType())
7249     return 1;
7250   // For builtin types, just use the standard type sizing method
7251   return (unsigned)getTypeSize(T);
7252 }
7253 
7254 QualType ASTContext::getCorrespondingUnsignedType(QualType T) const {
7255   assert(T->hasSignedIntegerRepresentation() && "Unexpected type");
7256 
7257   // Turn <4 x signed int> -> <4 x unsigned int>
7258   if (const VectorType *VTy = T->getAs<VectorType>())
7259     return getVectorType(getCorrespondingUnsignedType(VTy->getElementType()),
7260                          VTy->getNumElements(), VTy->getVectorKind());
7261 
7262   // For enums, we return the unsigned version of the base type.
7263   if (const EnumType *ETy = T->getAs<EnumType>())
7264     T = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
7265 
7266   const BuiltinType *BTy = T->getAs<BuiltinType>();
7267   assert(BTy && "Unexpected signed integer type");
7268   switch (BTy->getKind()) {
7269   case BuiltinType::Char_S:
7270   case BuiltinType::SChar:
7271     return UnsignedCharTy;
7272   case BuiltinType::Short:
7273     return UnsignedShortTy;
7274   case BuiltinType::Int:
7275     return UnsignedIntTy;
7276   case BuiltinType::Long:
7277     return UnsignedLongTy;
7278   case BuiltinType::LongLong:
7279     return UnsignedLongLongTy;
7280   case BuiltinType::Int128:
7281     return UnsignedInt128Ty;
7282   default:
7283     llvm_unreachable("Unexpected signed integer type");
7284   }
7285 }
7286 
7287 ASTMutationListener::~ASTMutationListener() { }
7288 
7289 
7290 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
7291 //                          Builtin Type Computation
7292 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
7293 
7294 /// DecodeTypeFromStr - This decodes one type descriptor from Str, advancing the
7295 /// pointer over the consumed characters.  This returns the resultant type.  If
7296 /// AllowTypeModifiers is false then modifier like * are not parsed, just basic
7297 /// types.  This allows "v2i*" to be parsed as a pointer to a v2i instead of
7298 /// a vector of "i*".
7299 ///
7300 /// RequiresICE is filled in on return to indicate whether the value is required
7301 /// to be an Integer Constant Expression.
7302 static QualType DecodeTypeFromStr(const char *&Str, const ASTContext &Context,
7303                                   ASTContext::GetBuiltinTypeError &Error,
7304                                   bool &RequiresICE,
7305                                   bool AllowTypeModifiers) {
7306   // Modifiers.
7307   int HowLong = 0;
7308   bool Signed = false, Unsigned = false;
7309   RequiresICE = false;
7310 
7311   // Read the prefixed modifiers first.
7312   bool Done = false;
7313   while (!Done) {
7314     switch (*Str++) {
7315     default: Done = true; --Str; break;
7316     case 'I':
7317       RequiresICE = true;
7318       break;
7319     case 'S':
7320       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!");
7321       assert(!Signed && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!");
7322       Signed = true;
7323       break;
7324     case 'U':
7325       assert(!Signed && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!");
7326       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!");
7327       Unsigned = true;
7328       break;
7329     case 'L':
7330       assert(HowLong <= 2 && "Can't have LLLL modifier");
7331       ++HowLong;
7332       break;
7333     }
7334   }
7335 
7336   QualType Type;
7337 
7338   // Read the base type.
7339   switch (*Str++) {
7340   default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type letter!");
7341   case 'v':
7342     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
7343            "Bad modifiers used with 'v'!");
7344     Type = Context.VoidTy;
7345     break;
7346   case 'f':
7347     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
7348            "Bad modifiers used with 'f'!");
7349     Type = Context.FloatTy;
7350     break;
7351   case 'd':
7352     assert(HowLong < 2 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
7353            "Bad modifiers used with 'd'!");
7354     if (HowLong)
7355       Type = Context.LongDoubleTy;
7356     else
7357       Type = Context.DoubleTy;
7358     break;
7359   case 's':
7360     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 's'!");
7361     if (Unsigned)
7362       Type = Context.UnsignedShortTy;
7363     else
7364       Type = Context.ShortTy;
7365     break;
7366   case 'i':
7367     if (HowLong == 3)
7368       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedInt128Ty : Context.Int128Ty;
7369     else if (HowLong == 2)
7370       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongLongTy : Context.LongLongTy;
7371     else if (HowLong == 1)
7372       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongTy : Context.LongTy;
7373     else
7374       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedIntTy : Context.IntTy;
7375     break;
7376   case 'c':
7377     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 'c'!");
7378     if (Signed)
7379       Type = Context.SignedCharTy;
7380     else if (Unsigned)
7381       Type = Context.UnsignedCharTy;
7382     else
7383       Type = Context.CharTy;
7384     break;
7385   case 'b': // boolean
7386     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'b'!");
7387     Type = Context.BoolTy;
7388     break;
7389   case 'z':  // size_t.
7390     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'z'!");
7391     Type = Context.getSizeType();
7392     break;
7393   case 'F':
7394     Type = Context.getCFConstantStringType();
7395     break;
7396   case 'G':
7397     Type = Context.getObjCIdType();
7398     break;
7399   case 'H':
7400     Type = Context.getObjCSelType();
7401     break;
7402   case 'M':
7403     Type = Context.getObjCSuperType();
7404     break;
7405   case 'a':
7406     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType();
7407     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!");
7408     break;
7409   case 'A':
7410     // This is a "reference" to a va_list; however, what exactly
7411     // this means depends on how va_list is defined. There are two
7412     // different kinds of va_list: ones passed by value, and ones
7413     // passed by reference.  An example of a by-value va_list is
7414     // x86, where va_list is a char*. An example of by-ref va_list
7415     // is x86-64, where va_list is a __va_list_tag[1]. For x86,
7416     // we want this argument to be a char*&; for x86-64, we want
7417     // it to be a __va_list_tag*.
7418     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType();
7419     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!");
7420     if (Type->isArrayType())
7421       Type = Context.getArrayDecayedType(Type);
7422     else
7423       Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type);
7424     break;
7425   case 'V': {
7426     char *End;
7427     unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
7428     assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size");
7429     Str = End;
7430 
7431     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error,
7432                                              RequiresICE, false);
7433     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require vector ICE");
7434 
7435     // TODO: No way to make AltiVec vectors in builtins yet.
7436     Type = Context.getVectorType(ElementType, NumElements,
7437                                  VectorType::GenericVector);
7438     break;
7439   }
7440   case 'E': {
7441     char *End;
7442 
7443     unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
7444     assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size");
7445 
7446     Str = End;
7447 
7448     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE,
7449                                              false);
7450     Type = Context.getExtVectorType(ElementType, NumElements);
7451     break;
7452   }
7453   case 'X': {
7454     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE,
7455                                              false);
7456     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require complex ICE");
7457     Type = Context.getComplexType(ElementType);
7458     break;
7459   }
7460   case 'Y' : {
7461     Type = Context.getPointerDiffType();
7462     break;
7463   }
7464   case 'P':
7465     Type = Context.getFILEType();
7466     if (Type.isNull()) {
7467       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_stdio;
7468       return QualType();
7469     }
7470     break;
7471   case 'J':
7472     if (Signed)
7473       Type = Context.getsigjmp_bufType();
7474     else
7475       Type = Context.getjmp_bufType();
7476 
7477     if (Type.isNull()) {
7478       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_setjmp;
7479       return QualType();
7480     }
7481     break;
7482   case 'K':
7483     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'K'!");
7484     Type = Context.getucontext_tType();
7485 
7486     if (Type.isNull()) {
7487       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_ucontext;
7488       return QualType();
7489     }
7490     break;
7491   case 'p':
7492     Type = Context.getProcessIDType();
7493     break;
7494   }
7495 
7496   // If there are modifiers and if we're allowed to parse them, go for it.
7497   Done = !AllowTypeModifiers;
7498   while (!Done) {
7499     switch (char c = *Str++) {
7500     default: Done = true; --Str; break;
7501     case '*':
7502     case '&': {
7503       // Both pointers and references can have their pointee types
7504       // qualified with an address space.
7505       char *End;
7506       unsigned AddrSpace = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
7507       if (End != Str && AddrSpace != 0) {
7508         Type = Context.getAddrSpaceQualType(Type, AddrSpace);
7509         Str = End;
7510       }
7511       if (c == '*')
7512         Type = Context.getPointerType(Type);
7513       else
7514         Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type);
7515       break;
7516     }
7517     // FIXME: There's no way to have a built-in with an rvalue ref arg.
7518     case 'C':
7519       Type = Type.withConst();
7520       break;
7521     case 'D':
7522       Type = Context.getVolatileType(Type);
7523       break;
7524     case 'R':
7525       Type = Type.withRestrict();
7526       break;
7527     }
7528   }
7529 
7530   assert((!RequiresICE || Type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType()) &&
7531          "Integer constant 'I' type must be an integer");
7532 
7533   return Type;
7534 }
7535 
7536 /// GetBuiltinType - Return the type for the specified builtin.
7537 QualType ASTContext::GetBuiltinType(unsigned Id,
7538                                     GetBuiltinTypeError &Error,
7539                                     unsigned *IntegerConstantArgs) const {
7540   const char *TypeStr = BuiltinInfo.GetTypeString(Id);
7541 
7542   SmallVector<QualType, 8> ArgTypes;
7543 
7544   bool RequiresICE = false;
7545   Error = GE_None;
7546   QualType ResType = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error,
7547                                        RequiresICE, true);
7548   if (Error != GE_None)
7549     return QualType();
7550 
7551   assert(!RequiresICE && "Result of intrinsic cannot be required to be an ICE");
7552 
7553   while (TypeStr[0] && TypeStr[0] != '.') {
7554     QualType Ty = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error, RequiresICE, true);
7555     if (Error != GE_None)
7556       return QualType();
7557 
7558     // If this argument is required to be an IntegerConstantExpression and the
7559     // caller cares, fill in the bitmask we return.
7560     if (RequiresICE && IntegerConstantArgs)
7561       *IntegerConstantArgs |= 1 << ArgTypes.size();
7562 
7563     // Do array -> pointer decay.  The builtin should use the decayed type.
7564     if (Ty->isArrayType())
7565       Ty = getArrayDecayedType(Ty);
7566 
7567     ArgTypes.push_back(Ty);
7568   }
7569 
7570   assert((TypeStr[0] != '.' || TypeStr[1] == 0) &&
7571          "'.' should only occur at end of builtin type list!");
7572 
7573   FunctionType::ExtInfo EI;
7574   if (BuiltinInfo.isNoReturn(Id)) EI = EI.withNoReturn(true);
7575 
7576   bool Variadic = (TypeStr[0] == '.');
7577 
7578   // We really shouldn't be making a no-proto type here, especially in C++.
7579   if (ArgTypes.empty() && Variadic)
7580     return getFunctionNoProtoType(ResType, EI);
7581 
7582   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI;
7583   EPI.ExtInfo = EI;
7584   EPI.Variadic = Variadic;
7585 
7586   return getFunctionType(ResType, ArgTypes, EPI);
7587 }
7588 
7589 GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForFunction(const FunctionDecl *FD) {
7590   GVALinkage External = GVA_StrongExternal;
7591 
7592   Linkage L = FD->getLinkage();
7593   switch (L) {
7594   case NoLinkage:
7595   case InternalLinkage:
7596   case UniqueExternalLinkage:
7597     return GVA_Internal;
7598 
7599   case ExternalLinkage:
7600     switch (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()) {
7601     case TSK_Undeclared:
7602     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization:
7603       External = GVA_StrongExternal;
7604       break;
7605 
7606     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition:
7607       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation;
7608 
7609     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration:
7610     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation:
7611       External = GVA_TemplateInstantiation;
7612       break;
7613     }
7614   }
7615 
7616   if (!FD->isInlined())
7617     return External;
7618 
7619   if (!getLangOpts().CPlusPlus || FD->hasAttr<GNUInlineAttr>()) {
7620     // GNU or C99 inline semantics. Determine whether this symbol should be
7621     // externally visible.
7622     if (FD->isInlineDefinitionExternallyVisible())
7623       return External;
7624 
7625     // C99 inline semantics, where the symbol is not externally visible.
7626     return GVA_C99Inline;
7627   }
7628 
7629   // C++0x [temp.explicit]p9:
7630   //   [ Note: The intent is that an inline function that is the subject of
7631   //   an explicit instantiation declaration will still be implicitly
7632   //   instantiated when used so that the body can be considered for
7633   //   inlining, but that no out-of-line copy of the inline function would be
7634   //   generated in the translation unit. -- end note ]
7635   if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()
7636                                        == TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration)
7637     return GVA_C99Inline;
7638 
7639   return GVA_CXXInline;
7640 }
7641 
7642 GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForVariable(const VarDecl *VD) {
7643   // If this is a static data member, compute the kind of template
7644   // specialization. Otherwise, this variable is not part of a
7645   // template.
7646   TemplateSpecializationKind TSK = TSK_Undeclared;
7647   if (VD->isStaticDataMember())
7648     TSK = VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind();
7649 
7650   Linkage L = VD->getLinkage();
7651 
7652   switch (L) {
7653   case NoLinkage:
7654   case InternalLinkage:
7655   case UniqueExternalLinkage:
7656     return GVA_Internal;
7657 
7658   case ExternalLinkage:
7659     switch (TSK) {
7660     case TSK_Undeclared:
7661     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization:
7662       return GVA_StrongExternal;
7663 
7664     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration:
7665       llvm_unreachable("Variable should not be instantiated");
7666       // Fall through to treat this like any other instantiation.
7667 
7668     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition:
7669       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation;
7670 
7671     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation:
7672       return GVA_TemplateInstantiation;
7673     }
7674   }
7675 
7676   llvm_unreachable("Invalid Linkage!");
7677 }
7678 
7679 bool ASTContext::DeclMustBeEmitted(const Decl *D) {
7680   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
7681     if (!VD->isFileVarDecl())
7682       return false;
7683   } else if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
7684     // We never need to emit an uninstantiated function template.
7685     if (FD->getTemplatedKind() == FunctionDecl::TK_FunctionTemplate)
7686       return false;
7687   } else
7688     return false;
7689 
7690   // If this is a member of a class template, we do not need to emit it.
7691   if (D->getDeclContext()->isDependentContext())
7692     return false;
7693 
7694   // Weak references don't produce any output by themselves.
7695   if (D->hasAttr<WeakRefAttr>())
7696     return false;
7697 
7698   // Aliases and used decls are required.
7699   if (D->hasAttr<AliasAttr>() || D->hasAttr<UsedAttr>())
7700     return true;
7701 
7702   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
7703     // Forward declarations aren't required.
7704     if (!FD->doesThisDeclarationHaveABody())
7705       return FD->doesDeclarationForceExternallyVisibleDefinition();
7706 
7707     // Constructors and destructors are required.
7708     if (FD->hasAttr<ConstructorAttr>() || FD->hasAttr<DestructorAttr>())
7709       return true;
7710 
7711     // The key function for a class is required.  This rule only comes
7712     // into play when inline functions can be key functions, though.
7713     if (getTargetInfo().getCXXABI().canKeyFunctionBeInline()) {
7714       if (const CXXMethodDecl *MD = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(FD)) {
7715         const CXXRecordDecl *RD = MD->getParent();
7716         if (MD->isOutOfLine() && RD->isDynamicClass()) {
7717           const CXXMethodDecl *KeyFunc = getCurrentKeyFunction(RD);
7718           if (KeyFunc && KeyFunc->getCanonicalDecl() == MD->getCanonicalDecl())
7719             return true;
7720         }
7721       }
7722     }
7723 
7724     GVALinkage Linkage = GetGVALinkageForFunction(FD);
7725 
7726     // static, static inline, always_inline, and extern inline functions can
7727     // always be deferred.  Normal inline functions can be deferred in C99/C++.
7728     // Implicit template instantiations can also be deferred in C++.
7729     if (Linkage == GVA_Internal  || Linkage == GVA_C99Inline ||
7730         Linkage == GVA_CXXInline || Linkage == GVA_TemplateInstantiation)
7731       return false;
7732     return true;
7733   }
7734 
7735   const VarDecl *VD = cast<VarDecl>(D);
7736   assert(VD->isFileVarDecl() && "Expected file scoped var");
7737 
7738   if (VD->isThisDeclarationADefinition() == VarDecl::DeclarationOnly)
7739     return false;
7740 
7741   // Variables that can be needed in other TUs are required.
7742   GVALinkage L = GetGVALinkageForVariable(VD);
7743   if (L != GVA_Internal && L != GVA_TemplateInstantiation)
7744     return true;
7745 
7746   // Variables that have destruction with side-effects are required.
7747   if (VD->getType().isDestructedType())
7748     return true;
7749 
7750   // Variables that have initialization with side-effects are required.
7751   if (VD->getInit() && VD->getInit()->HasSideEffects(*this))
7752     return true;
7753 
7754   return false;
7755 }
7756 
7757 CallingConv ASTContext::getDefaultCXXMethodCallConv(bool isVariadic) {
7758   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object
7759   return ABI->getDefaultMethodCallConv(isVariadic);
7760 }
7761 
7762 CallingConv ASTContext::getCanonicalCallConv(CallingConv CC) const {
7763   if (CC == CC_C && !LangOpts.MRTD &&
7764       getTargetInfo().getCXXABI().isMemberFunctionCCDefault())
7765     return CC_Default;
7766   return CC;
7767 }
7768 
7769 bool ASTContext::isNearlyEmpty(const CXXRecordDecl *RD) const {
7770   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object
7771   return ABI->isNearlyEmpty(RD);
7772 }
7773 
7774 MangleContext *ASTContext::createMangleContext() {
7775   switch (Target->getCXXABI().getKind()) {
7776   case TargetCXXABI::GenericAArch64:
7777   case TargetCXXABI::GenericItanium:
7778   case TargetCXXABI::GenericARM:
7779   case TargetCXXABI::iOS:
7780     return createItaniumMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics());
7781   case TargetCXXABI::Microsoft:
7782     return createMicrosoftMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics());
7783   }
7784   llvm_unreachable("Unsupported ABI");
7785 }
7786 
7787 CXXABI::~CXXABI() {}
7788 
7789 size_t ASTContext::getSideTableAllocatedMemory() const {
7790   return ASTRecordLayouts.getMemorySize()
7791     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCLayouts)
7792     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(KeyFunctions)
7793     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCImpls)
7794     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(BlockVarCopyInits)
7795     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(DeclAttrs)
7796     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember)
7797     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingDecl)
7798     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl)
7799     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl)
7800     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(OverriddenMethods)
7801     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(Types)
7802     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(VariableArrayTypes)
7803     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ClassScopeSpecializationPattern);
7804 }
7805 
7806 void ASTContext::addUnnamedTag(const TagDecl *Tag) {
7807   // FIXME: This mangling should be applied to function local classes too
7808   if (!Tag->getName().empty() || Tag->getTypedefNameForAnonDecl() ||
7809       !isa<CXXRecordDecl>(Tag->getParent()) || Tag->getLinkage() != ExternalLinkage)
7810     return;
7811 
7812   std::pair<llvm::DenseMap<const DeclContext *, unsigned>::iterator, bool> P =
7813     UnnamedMangleContexts.insert(std::make_pair(Tag->getParent(), 0));
7814   UnnamedMangleNumbers.insert(std::make_pair(Tag, P.first->second++));
7815 }
7816 
7817 int ASTContext::getUnnamedTagManglingNumber(const TagDecl *Tag) const {
7818   llvm::DenseMap<const TagDecl *, unsigned>::const_iterator I =
7819     UnnamedMangleNumbers.find(Tag);
7820   return I != UnnamedMangleNumbers.end() ? I->second : -1;
7821 }
7822 
7823 unsigned ASTContext::getLambdaManglingNumber(CXXMethodDecl *CallOperator) {
7824   CXXRecordDecl *Lambda = CallOperator->getParent();
7825   return LambdaMangleContexts[Lambda->getDeclContext()]
7826            .getManglingNumber(CallOperator);
7827 }
7828 
7829 
7830 void ASTContext::setParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D, unsigned int index) {
7831   ParamIndices[D] = index;
7832 }
7833 
7834 unsigned ASTContext::getParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D) const {
7835   ParameterIndexTable::const_iterator I = ParamIndices.find(D);
7836   assert(I != ParamIndices.end() &&
7837          "ParmIndices lacks entry set by ParmVarDecl");
7838   return I->second;
7839 }
7840